2
About Owner's Manual
This document, “Owner’s Manual <Complete Guide>”, includes detailed
explanations of all the functions and operations of the camera.
How to Use the <Complete Guide> (HTML)
Display on a PC
Example: Display in English
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
About Owner's Manual
3
Display on a smartphone
Example: Display in English
(A) Search field
Enter the term to search for and press [ ].
By entering multiple search terms separated by spaces, you can find pages that
include all of the search terms you entered.
No distinction is made between upper and lower case or between single- and
double-byte characters.
(B) ‘Contents’
Description pages open when you press headings.
Use [ ]/[ ] to open and collapse the ‘Contents’.
(C) Breadcrumbs
Indicates the location of the page that is currently open.
Press [ ] to return to the front page.
(D) ‘Back to Top’ button
(E) ‘Show Previous Page’ button/‘Show Next Page’ button
(A)
(B)
(C) (F)
(E)
(D)
About Owner's Manual
4
(F) ‘Show Contents’ button/‘Close Contents’ button
When displaying on a smartphone, press [ ] to display the ‘Contents’.
Press [ ] to exit ‘Contents’.
Symbols Used in This Document
Black icons show conditions in which these can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which these cannot be used.
Example:
Pictures/Videos
Recording mode
Operating symbols
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C)
(E)
(F)
About Owner's Manual
5
• Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
• This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example: Set the [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu
[ ] [ ] [Picture Quality] Select [STD.]
• Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
• Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060).
(A) Front dial
(B) Rear dial
(C) 3421
Cursor button up/down/left/right
or
Joystick up/down/left/right
(D) Press the center of the joystick
(E) [MENU/SET] button
(F) Control dial
6
Contents
About Owner's Manual 2
1. Introduction 18
Before Use.................................................................................19
Standard Accessories................................................................22
Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................24
Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................25
Names of Parts..........................................................................28
Camera.............................................................................................. 28
Lens................................................................................................... 36
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays .............................................................. 38
2. Getting Started 40
Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................41
Charging the Battery..................................................................43
Charging with the Charger ................................................................ 44
Battery Insertion ................................................................................ 47
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging.............................. 49
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power
(Supplying Power/Charging).............................................................. 53
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 55
[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 57
Inserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................59
Formatting Cards (Initialization)......................................................... 62
Attaching a Lens........................................................................63
Attaching a Lens Hood ...................................................................... 66
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................69
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............70
Clock Set ........................................................................................... 70
Contents
7
3. Basic Operations 74
Basic Recording Operations ......................................................75
How to Hold the Camera ................................................................... 75
Recording .......................................................................................... 77
Selecting the Recording Mode .......................................................... 79
Camera Setting Operations .......................................................80
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................85
Setting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 85
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ................................ 86
Switching the Display Information ..................................................... 88
Quick Menu................................................................................91
Control Panel.............................................................................93
Menu Operation Methods ..........................................................95
Menu operation ................................................................................. 95
[Reset] ............................................................................................. 100
Intelligent Auto Mode ...............................................................101
Recording Using Touch Functions...........................................108
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................. 108
Touch AE......................................................................................... 111
4. Image Recording 113
[Aspect Ratio] ..........................................................................114
[Picture Size]............................................................................115
[Picture Quality] .......................................................................116
[Double Card Slot Function].....................................................118
[Folder / File Settings]..............................................................120
[File Number Reset].................................................................123
Contents
8
5. Focus/Zoom 124
Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................125
Using AF ..................................................................................127
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 132
Selecting the AF Mode ............................................................135
[Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect AF] .............................. 138
[Tracking]......................................................................................... 143
[225-Area]........................................................................................ 145
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]/[Zone (Square)]/[Zone (Oval)]......................... 146
[1-Area+]/[1-Area]............................................................................ 149
[Pinpoint] ......................................................................................... 152
[Custom1] to [Custom3]................................................................... 155
AF Area Movement Operation .................................................158
Moving the AF Area by Touch......................................................... 161
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad ........................... 163
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 166
Record Using MF.....................................................................167
Recording with Zoom...............................................................174
Extended Tele Conversion .............................................................. 176
[Power Zoom Lens] ......................................................................... 180
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 181
Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................182
Taking Burst Pictures...............................................................184
6K/4K Photo Recording ...........................................................190
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File..............................197
Correcting Pictures After Recording
(Post-Recording Refinement).......................................................... 200
Picture Selection Operations........................................................... 202
Contents
9
Post-Focus Recording .............................................................207
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save ........................... 211
Focus Stacking................................................................................ 213
Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................216
Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................221
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................225
Recording Using the Self-timer................................................227
Bracket Recording ...................................................................231
[Silent Mode]............................................................................239
[Shutter Type] ..........................................................................240
Image Stabilizer.......................................................................243
Image Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 246
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity 251
[Metering Mode].......................................................................252
Program AE Mode ...................................................................253
Aperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................257
Shutter-Priority AE Mode.........................................................260
Manual Exposure Mode...........................................................263
Preview Mode..........................................................................267
Exposure Compensation .........................................................269
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)............................271
ISO Sensitivity .........................................................................273
8. White Balance/Image Quality 277
White Balance (WB) ................................................................278
Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 283
[Photo Style] ............................................................................285
Contents
10
[Filter Settings].........................................................................293
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 302
9. Flash 303
Using an External Flash (Optional)..........................................304
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover........................................................ 305
Setting Flash............................................................................308
[Flash Mode].................................................................................... 309
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]............................................... 311
[Flash Adjust.].................................................................................. 313
[Flash Synchro] ............................................................................... 315
[Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................... 316
Recording Using a Wireless Flash...........................................317
10. Recording Videos 324
Recording Videos ....................................................................325
Recording Videos ............................................................................ 325
Creative Video Mode ...............................................................330
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 331
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 334
Video Recording Settings ........................................................335
[System Frequency] ........................................................................ 336
[Rec. File Format]............................................................................ 337
[Rec Quality].................................................................................... 338
[Image Area of Video]...................................................................... 348
Time Code ...............................................................................350
Setting the Time Code..................................................................... 350
Using AF (Video) .....................................................................353
[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 354
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 355
Contents
11
Video Brightness and Coloring ................................................356
[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 357
[Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 358
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 360
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 362
Audio Settings..........................................................................364
[Sound Rec Level Disp.].................................................................. 364
[Mute Sound Input] .......................................................................... 365
[Sound Rec Gain Level] .................................................................. 365
[Sound Rec Level Adj.].................................................................... 366
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ............................................................... 366
[Wind Noise Canceller].................................................................... 367
[Lens Noise Cut].............................................................................. 368
Main Assist Functions..............................................................369
[SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 370
[WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 371
[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 375
[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 377
[Frame Marker]................................................................................ 379
Color bars/Test Tone....................................................................... 380
[Variable Frame Rate]..............................................................382
[Focus Transition] ....................................................................386
[Live Cropping].........................................................................390
Log Recording .........................................................................396
[V-Log L] Settings............................................................................ 396
[V-LogL View Assist] ....................................................................... 398
HLG Videos .............................................................................400
[Hybrid Log Gamma] settings.......................................................... 401
[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 404
Anamorphic Recording ............................................................405
Contents
12
6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video ........................................................ 406
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 407
[Synchro Scan] ........................................................................410
[Loop Recording (video)] .........................................................412
[Segmented File Recording] ....................................................414
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be
Recorded .................................................................................416
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) 421
HDMI Devices (HDMI Output) .................................................422
Attaching the Cable Holder ............................................................. 424
Images Output via HDMI ................................................................. 427
HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/Frame Rate) ............429
Settings for Down-Converting.......................................................... 429
HDMI Output Settings..............................................................432
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 432
Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 433
Outputting Down-converted Audio to an HDMI Device ................... 434
Outputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 434
Output the enlarged display of MF assist via HDMI ........................ 435
External Microphones (Optional) .............................................436
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)........................................439
Headphones ............................................................................441
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images 443
Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................444
Playing Back Videos................................................................446
Extracting a Picture ......................................................................... 449
Switching the Display Mode.....................................................450
Contents
13
Enlarged Display ............................................................................. 450
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 452
Calendar Playback .......................................................................... 454
Group Images..........................................................................456
Deleting Images.......................................................................458
[RAW Processing]....................................................................460
[Video Divide]...........................................................................467
13. Camera Customization 469
Fn Buttons ...............................................................................471
Fn Button Default Settings .............................................................. 472
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 474
Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 485
[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................487
Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 487
Temporarily Change Dial Operation................................................ 489
Quick Menu Customization......................................................490
Register to the Quick Menu............................................................. 490
Custom Mode ..........................................................................498
Register in Custom Mode................................................................ 498
Using Custom Mode........................................................................ 501
Calling Up Settings.......................................................................... 502
My Menu..................................................................................503
Registration in My Menu.................................................................. 503
Edit My Menu .................................................................................. 504
[Save/Restore Camera Setting] ...............................................505
14. Menu Guide 507
List of Menu .............................................................................508
Contents
14
[Photo] Menu ...........................................................................518
[Photo] menu ([Image Quality]) ....................................................... 518
[Photo] menu ([Focus]).................................................................... 523
[Photo] menu ([Flash])..................................................................... 525
[Photo] menu ([Others (Photo)]) ...................................................... 528
[Video] Menu............................................................................534
[Video] menu ([Image Quality])........................................................ 534
[Video] menu ([Image Format])........................................................ 538
[Video] menu ([Focus]) .................................................................... 540
[Video] menu ([Audio])..................................................................... 542
[Video] menu ([Others (Video)])....................................................... 545
[Custom] Menu ........................................................................548
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])..................................................... 549
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) .................................................... 553
[Custom] menu ([Operation])........................................................... 559
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) ................................... 564
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 575
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])............................................................... 579
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) ..................................................... 580
[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................583
[Setup] menu ([Card/File]) ............................................................... 583
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])................................................... 585
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) ................................................................. 588
[Setup] menu ([Setting]) .................................................................. 592
[Setup] menu ([Others])................................................................... 594
[Playback] Menu ......................................................................597
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu......................... 597
[Playback] menu ([Playback Mode])................................................ 599
[Playback] menu ([Process Image])................................................. 602
[Playback] menu ([Add/Delete Info.])............................................... 604
[Playback] menu ([Edit Image]) ....................................................... 605
Contents
15
[Playback] menu ([Others]).............................................................. 608
Entering Characters.................................................................609
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 610
Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................612
Flow of connecting a smartphone ................................................... 612
Installing “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 614
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)..................... 615
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 622
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ..............................629
[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 631
[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 634
[Import images]................................................................................ 637
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 639
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 642
[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 644
[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 645
[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 646
Sending Images from the Camera...........................................647
[Smartphone]................................................................................... 651
[PC] ................................................................................................. 655
[Printer]............................................................................................ 659
Wi-Fi Connections ...................................................................661
[Via Network] ................................................................................... 662
[Direct] ............................................................................................. 666
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 668
Send Settings and Selecting Images.......................................671
Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 671
Selecting Images............................................................................. 673
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ..................................................................674
Contents
16
16. Streaming Function 676
Stream by Operating a Smartphone........................................677
Stream by Operating the Camera............................................679
Streaming Settings ..................................................................682
Notes When Using the Streaming Function .................................... 686
17. Connecting to Other Devices 688
Viewing on a TV.......................................................................690
Importing Images to a PC ........................................................694
Installing Software ........................................................................... 696
Storing on a Recorder..............................................................698
Tethered Recording.................................................................699
Installing Software ........................................................................... 700
Operating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 701
Printing.....................................................................................702
18. Materials 706
Digital Camera Accessory System ..........................................707
Using Optional Accessories.....................................................709
Battery Grip (Optional) .................................................................... 709
Shutter Remote Control (Optional).................................................. 711
Tripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 712
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)................................. 713
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ....................................................714
Recording Screen............................................................................ 714
Playback Screen ............................................................................. 728
Message Displays....................................................................733
Troubleshooting.......................................................................736
Power, Battery................................................................................. 736
Contents
17
Recording ........................................................................................ 737
Video ............................................................................................... 742
Playback.......................................................................................... 743
Monitor/Viewfinder........................................................................... 744
Flash................................................................................................ 744
Wi-Fi Function ................................................................................. 745
TV, PC, Printer ................................................................................ 748
Others.............................................................................................. 749
Cautions for Use ......................................................................750
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available
Recording Time with the Battery..............................................762
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video
Recording Time with Cards .....................................................766
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for
Copying....................................................................................771
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...790
Specifications...........................................................................797
Trademarks and Licences .......................................................809
1. Introduction – Before Use
19
Before Use
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality.
Make sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version.
We recommend using the latest firmware version.
• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and
select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the
firmware in [Firmware Version].
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, visit
the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Handling of the Camera
When using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force.
These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
When using in low temperatures (s10 oC to 0 oC (14 oF to 32 oF))
– Before use, attach a Panasonic lens with a minimum recommended operating
temperature of j10 oC (14 oF).
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a
rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism
in the body. It is not a malfunction.
1. Introduction – Before Use
20
Splash Resistant
Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this
camera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust.
Splash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is
subjected to direct contact with water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following
precautions are taken:
– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically
designed to support this feature.
– Securely close the doors, socket caps, contact points cover, etc.
– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and
moisture to enter inside.
– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor
is Fogged Up)
• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care
as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and
monitor.
• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog
will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the
ambient temperature.
Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
1. Introduction – Before Use
21
Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
Also Read “Cautions for Use” (Cautions for Use: 750)
1. Introduction – Standard Accessories
22
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
•
The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>”
(supplied).
• Digital camera body
(This is referred to as camera in this document.)
• Battery pack
(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)
– Charge the battery before use.
• Battery charger
(This is referred to as battery charger or charger in this document.)
• AC adaptor
– This is used for charging and power supply.
• USB connection cable
• Cable holder
• Shoulder strap
• Body cap
*1
• Eye cup
*1
• Hot shoe cover
*1
• Cover for the battery grip connector
*1
• Flash synchro socket cap
*1
*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.
1. Introduction – Standard Accessories
23
Items Supplied with DC-GH5M2L (Lens Kit Product)
• Interchangeable lens
*2
:
H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12–60mm/F2.8–4.0 ASPH./POWER
O.I.S.”
– This lens is dust and splash resistant.
– The recommended operating temperature is from
j
10 °C to 40 °C (14
o
F to 104
o
F).
• Lens hood
• Lens cap
*3
• Lens rear cap
*3
Items Supplied with DC-GH5M2M (Lens Kit Product)
• Interchangeable lens
*2
:
H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12–60mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
– This lens is dust and splash resistant.
– The recommended operating temperature is from 0 °C to 40 °C (32 oF to 104 oF).
• Lens hood
• Lens cap
*3
• Lens rear cap
*3
*2 This is referred to as lens in these operating instructions.
*3 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.
• The memory card is optional.
• Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can
purchase the accessories separately.)
• Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.
• Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.
(For U.S.A. only)
• If accessories are lost, customers can visit us at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support
for further information about obtaining replacement parts.
(For Canada only)
• If any accessories are lost, customers in Canada should visit our support page at
www.panasonic.ca/english/support
for further information about obtaining replacement parts.
1. Introduction – Lenses That Can Be Used
24
Lenses That Can Be Used
This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with the Micro Four
Thirds
TM
System lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount).
You can also use the Leica M Mount interchangeable lens by attaching the M Mount
Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional).
About the lens and functions
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as Auto Focus, Image Stabilizer,
and zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
• Refer to catalogs/websites for most current information regarding supported
lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
• The focal length noted on the Micro Four Thirds lens is equivalent to double
when converted to the 35 mm film camera. (It will be equivalent to 100 mm lens
when a 50 mm lens is used.)
1. Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
25
Memory Cards That Can Be Used
You can use the following memory cards with this camera. (As of May
2021)
•
For the latest information on memory cards with confirmed operation, check the
following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
SD memory card/SDHC memory card/SDXC memory card (Maximum 256 GB)
• SD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to by
the generic name of card in this document.
• This camera supports cards compliant with UHS Speed Class 3 of the UHS-I/
UHS-II standard and Video Speed Class 90 of the UHS-II standard.
1. Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
26
• When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD Speed
Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.
– Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
[Video Record]
[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Bit rate of the
recording quality
Speed Class
Example of
indication
72 Mbps or less
Class 10
UHS Speed Class 1 or higher
Video Speed Class 10 or higher
100 Mbps to
200 Mbps
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
400 Mbps Video Speed Class 60 or higher
Speed Class Example of indication
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
1. Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
27
• You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect
switch (A) on the card to “LOCK”.
• The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static
electricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up
important data.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(A)
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
29
(1) Stereo microphone ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 366)
• Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record.
(2) Drive mode dial (
Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
(3) Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 305)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(4) Mode dial (
Selecting the Recording Mode: 79)
(5) [WB] (White balance) button (
White Balance (WB): 278)
(6) [ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button (
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
(7) [ ] (Exposure compensation) button (
Exposure Compensation: 269)
(8) Video rec. button (
Recording Videos: 325)
(9) [ ] (Photo style) button (
[Photo Style]: 285)
(10) Charging light (
Charging light Indications: 50)/
NETWORK connection lamp (
NETWORK connection lamp: 611)
(11) [ ] (Recording distance reference mark) (
Operations on the MF Assist
Screen: 172
)
(12) Status indicator (
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 70)
(13) Camera on/off switch (
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time):
70
)
(14) Mode dial lock button (
Selecting the Recording Mode: 79)
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
30
(15) [LVF] button (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 86)
(16) Shoulder strap eyelet (
Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 41)
(17) [ ] (Playback) button (
Playing Back Pictures: 444)
(18) Joystick (
Joystick: 83)/
Fn buttons (
Fn Buttons: 471)
Center: Fn8, 3: Fn9, 1: Fn10, 4:Fn11, 2: Fn12
(19) Monitor (
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 38, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 714)/
Touch screen (
Touch Screen: 84)
(20) [AF ON] button (
[AF ON] button: 129)
(21) Focus mode lever (
Selecting the Focus Mode: 125)
(22) Rear dial (
Front Dial/Rear Dial: 81)
(23) [DISP.] button (
Switching the Display Information: 88)
(24) [ ] (AF mode) button (
Using AF: 127)
(25) [Q] (Quick menu) button (
Quick Menu: 91)
(26) Cursor buttons (
Cursor Buttons: 82)/
Fn buttons (
Fn Buttons: 471)
3: Fn13, 1: Fn14, 4: Fn15, 2:Fn16
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
32
(30) Eye cup (Cleaning the Viewfinder: 753)
• Keep the eye cup out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(31) Viewfinder (
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 38, Switching Between the Monitor
and Viewfinder: 86
, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 714)
(32) Eye sensor (
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 86)
(33) Diopter adjustment dial (
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter: 85)
(34) Speaker (
[Beep]: 588)
(35) Card door (
Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
(36) [REMOTE] socket (
Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 711)
(37) Card access light 1 (
Card Access Indications: 60)
(38) Card slot 1 (
Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
(39) Card slot 2 (
Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
(40) Card access light 2 (
Card Access Indications: 60)
(41) Battery door release lever (
Battery Insertion: 47)
(42) Battery door (
Battery Insertion: 47)
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
33
(43) DC Coupler cover (AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 713)
• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the Panasonic DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional) and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) are used.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional).
• When using an AC Adaptor (optional), use the AC cable supplied with the AC
Adaptor (optional).
(44) Battery grip connector (cover for the battery grip connector) (
Battery Grip
(Optional): 709
)
• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
(45) Tripod mount (
Tripod: 760)
• If you attempt to attach a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or
more, you may not be able to securely fix it in place or it may damage the
camera.
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
34
(46) Self-timer light (Recording Using the Self-timer: 227)/
AF assist light (
[AF Assist Light]: 523)
(47) Front dial (
Front Dial/Rear Dial: 81)
(48) Shutter button (
Recording: 77)
(49) Lens fitting mark (
Attaching a Lens: 63)
(50) Grip
(51) Preview button (
Preview Mode: 267)/
Fn button (Fn2) (
Fn Buttons: 471)
(52) Contact points
(53) Flash synchro socket (flash synchro socket cap) (
Connecting a Synchro Cable
to the Flash Synchro Socket: 306
)
• Use an external flash with a synchronization voltage of 400 V or less.
• Keep the flash synchro socket cap out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
(54) Sensor
(55) [MIC] socket (
External Microphones (Optional): 436)
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
35
(56) Headphone socket (Headphones: 441)
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
(57) [HDMI] socket (
HDMI Devices (HDMI Output): 422, [HDMI] socket: 688)
(58) USB port (
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 49, USB port: 689)
(59) Cable holder mount (
Attaching the Cable Holder: 424)
(60) Lens release button (
Removing a Lens: 65)
(61) Lens lock pin
(62) Mount
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
36
Lens
H-ES12060
H-FS12060
(1) Lens surface
(2) Tele
(3) Focus ring (
Adjust the focus.: 169)
(4) Zoom ring (
Recording with Zoom: 174)
(5) Wide
(6) O.I.S. switch
(7) [AF/MF] switch
• When either the [AF/MF] switch of the lens or the setting of the camera is set to
[MF], Manual Focus (MF) is enabled.
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
38
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays
At the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following
icons.
• For information about the icons other than those described here (
Monitor/
Viewfinder Displays: 714
)
Viewfinder
Monitor
606060 3.53.53.5
200
200200
999
999999
FF
606060 3.53.53.5
FF
200200200
999
999999
1. Introduction – Names of Parts
39
(1) Photo Style
(2) Level gauge
(3) Picture quality/Picture size
(4) AF area
(5) Focus mode
(6) AF mode
(7) Image stabilizer
(8) Focus (green)/Recording state (red)
(9) Recording mode
(10) Metering mode
(11) Shutter speed
(12) Aperture value
(13) Exposure compensation value/
Manual Exposure Assist
(14) ISO sensitivity
(15) Card slot/Double card slot function
(16) Number of still images that can be taken/
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously
(17) Battery indication
• Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
41
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
1
2
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
42
• Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
• Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
3
4
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
43
Charging the Battery
≥Charging with the Charger: 44
≥Battery Insertion: 47
≥Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 49
≥Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/
Charging): 53
≥Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 55
≥[Power Save Mode]: 57
You can charge the battery either using the supplied charger, or in the
camera body.
You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical
outlet.
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22/
DMW-BLF19. (As of May 2021)
– You can also use DMW-BLF19 (optional), but since it has a smaller battery
capacity than DMW-BLK22 (supplied/optional), it is recommended to use
DMW-BLK22 (supplied/optional).
• The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before
use.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
44
Charging with the Charger
Charging time: Approx. 230 min
•
Use the supplied charger and AC adaptor.
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
• Use the charger indoors.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
45
1
Connect the charger and the AC adaptor with the USB
connection cable.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
2
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3
Insert the battery.
≥The [CHARGE] light (A) blinks and charging begins.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
46
[CHARGE] Light Indications
(A) Blinking
(B) On
(C) Off
• When the battery is inserted while the charger is not connected to the power source,
the charging lights turn on for a certain period to allow you to confirm the battery
level.
Charging
status
0 % to 49 % 50 % to 79 % 80 % to 99 % 100 %
[CHARGE]
light
• After charging, disconnect the power source connection and remove the battery.
• If the [50%] light is blinking quickly, then charging is not occurring.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and
86 oF).
– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty.
Remove the connection to the power source, and wipe with a dry cloth.
(A)
(A)(B)
(A)(B)
(C)
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
47
Battery Insertion
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22/DMW-BLF19).
– DMW-BLF19 (optional) has a smaller battery capacity than DMW-BLK22.
• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
• Check that the lever (A) is holding the battery in place.
• Check that this unit is turned off.
1
2
(A)
3
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
48
Removing the Battery
1 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2 Open the battery door.
• Check that the card access light turned off and then open the battery door.
(
Card Access Indications: 60)
3 Push the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery.
• Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (rubber seal) of the
battery door.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
• The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after
charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
(A)
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
49
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging
Charging time: Approx. 220 min
•
Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
• The battery in the Battery Grip (DMW-BGGH5:optional) cannot be charged.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
50
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
3
Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using
the USB connection cable.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
4
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
• The charging light (A) blinks red and charging begins.
Charging light Indications
(A) Charging light (red)
On: Charging in progress
Off: Charging complete
Flashing: Charging error
(A)
3
1
2
4
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
51
• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the
camera with the USB connection cable.
In that case, charging may take a while.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied USB
connection cables.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
• While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and
86 oF).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
• Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera off, it
consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet in order to save power.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
52
Power Supply
When a battery is inserted in the camera then charged with the AC adaptor (supplied),
and the camera is turned on, you can record while supplying power.
• [ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
• You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the
camera and a USB device (PC, etc.).
• The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.
• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
• If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
53
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power
(Supplying Power/Charging)
Since this camera and the items supplied with the battery charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional) are compatible with USB PD (USB Power
Delivery), you can charge while the camera is being supplied with power.
Connect the USB connection cable, AC adapter and AC cable of the
battery charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) to the camera.
Charging time: Approx. 170 min
• Use the camera body and the AC adaptor supplied with the battery charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional). The camera is turned off.
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
(A) USB connection cable
(B) AC adaptor
(C) AC cable
(B)
(A)
(C)
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
54
• Insert the battery into the camera.
• Connect using the USB connection cable of the battery charger (DMW-BTC15:
optional).
• When the camera is on, charging will take longer than when the camera is off.
• Even when connecting with devices that support USB PD, you may not be able
to charge while using the camera.
• If connecting with devices (PC, etc.) that do not support USB PD and turning the
camera on, then this will supply power only.
• Turn off the camera before plugging or unplugging the power plug.
• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
55
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply
Power Indications
(A) USB connection cable supplying power
(B) Battery indication
(C) Using the battery in the Battery Grip
• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.
75 % or higher
50 % to 74 %
25 % to 49 %
24 % or below
Blinking in red
Low battery (The status indicator also blinks.)
• Charge or replace the battery.
(A) (C)(B)
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
56
• To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a genuine Panasonic
battery pack is used.
There is a possibility that other battery packs may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a
result of use of a counterfeit battery pack.
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power
plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
• Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cables on other devices.
This may cause a malfunction.
• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
• The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery
is fully charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
• Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
57
[Power Save Mode]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a
set time. Reduces battery consumption.
[ ] [ ] Select [Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected
from Wi-Fi.
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn
off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
[Power Save
LVF Shooting]
Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being
displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching is active.
[Time to Sleep]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is
put to sleep.
[Method of
Activation]
Sets the screen where the camera is put to
sleep.
[Only Control Panel]:
Puts the camera to sleep only when the
control panel (
Switching the Display
Information: 88
) is displayed.
[While Recording Standby]:
Puts the camera to sleep from any screen
during recording standby.
2. Getting Started – Charging the Battery
58
• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],
perform one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.
• [Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:
– While connected to a PC or printer
– During video recording/video playback
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with [Multiple Exposure]
– When recording with [Focus Transition]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
2. Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
59
Inserting Cards (Optional)
≥Formatting Cards (Initialization): 62
This camera supports the double card slot function.
When two cards are used, relay recording, backup recording, and
allocation recording are available.
(A) Card slot 1
(B) Card slot 2
• Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly
until they click.
1
A
2
(A)
(B)
3
2. Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
60
Card Access Indications
The card access light (C) turns on while the card is being accessed.
•
You can set the way to record to card slots 1 and 2:
[]
[ ] [Double Card Slot Function] ([Double Card Slot Function]:
118
)
• Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may
be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
(C)
2. Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
61
Removing a Card
1 Open the card door.
2 Push the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight.
• The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.
2. Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
62
Formatting Cards (Initialization)
Format the cards with the camera before use in order to ensure optimal
card performance.
[ ] [ ] Select [Card Format]
Settings: [Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
•
When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and
cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the
camera.
• You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored on
the card:
[]
[ ] [Save/Restore Camera Setting] [Keep Settings While
Format] (
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 505)
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
63
Attaching a Lens
≥Attaching a Lens Hood: 66
• Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
• Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust. If dirt or
dust gets on the lens (
Dirt on the Image Sensor: 752)
• Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
1
2
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
64
(A) Lens fitting mark
• When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function
with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation
of the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens
when you select [Yes]. (
[Lens Information]: 249)
• Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
3
(A)
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
65
Removing a Lens
1 While pressing the lens release button (B), rotate the lens in the direction of the
arrow until it stops and then remove it.
• After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
(B)
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
66
Attaching a Lens Hood
For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the
inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from
the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.
It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.
When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the
interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/H-FS12060)
Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.
•
Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will become bent.
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
67
1
Align mark (A) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
2
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to
align mark (B) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.
(A)
(B)
2. Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
68
Removing the Lens Hood (H-ES12060)
1 While pressing the lens hood button (C), rotate the lens hood in the direction of
the arrow and then remove it.
When carrying the camera
• The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction.
Example: H-ES12060
1 Align mark (B) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
(C)
(B)
2. Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
69
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
•
The angles of adjustment are guides only.
• Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.
1
2
3
2. Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
70
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the
First Time)
≥Clock Set: 70
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time
zone and clock appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
Clock Set
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON].
≥When the camera is turned on, the status indicator lights up.
≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step
4
.
2
When [Please set the language] appears, press or
.
3
Set the language.
≥Press 34 to select the language and then press or .
4
When [Please set the time zone] appears, press or
.
2. Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
71
5
Set the time zone.
≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or .
•
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move
forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
6
When [Please set the clock] appears, press or .
(A)
2. Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
72
7
Set the clock.
21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second).
34: Select a value.
To set the display order (B) and time display format (C)
≥Press 21 to select the time zone [Style] and then press or
, the screen for setting the display order and time display
format appears.
(B) (C)
2. Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
73
8
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
9
When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,
press or .
• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2021”.
• Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the
built-in battery.)
• [Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
–[ ]
[ ] [Time Zone] ([Time Zone]: 594)
–[ ]
[ ] [Clock Set]
3. Basic Operations – Basic Recording Operations
75
Basic Recording Operations
≥How to Hold the Camera: 75
≥Recording: 77
≥Selecting the Recording Mode: 79
How to Hold the Camera
To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your
side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
≥Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
≥Support the lens from below with your left hand.
•
Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other
objects.
(A) (B)
3. Basic Operations – Basic Recording Operations
76
Vertical Orientation Detection Function
This function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held
vertically orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically
oriented.
•
If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated.
(
[Rotate Disp.]: 600)
• When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation
detection function may not work correctly.
• You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording.
[]
[ ] [Vertical Position Info (Video)] ([Vertical Position Info
(Video)]: 582
)
3. Basic Operations – Basic Recording Operations
77
Recording
1
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently).
≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed.
(When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications
blink in red.)
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].
F3.5
F3.5
F3.560
60
60
(C) (A)(B)
3. Basic Operations – Basic Recording Operations
78
2
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further).
≥When recording videos, press the video rec. button. (10.
Recording Videos: 324)
•
Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture
display duration to your preferred setting. (
[Auto Review]: 564)
• With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu
to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture even when
the subject is not in focus. (
[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 553)
3. Basic Operations – Basic Recording Operations
79
Selecting the Recording Mode
1
Press the mode dial lock button (1) to release the lock.
• The dial is locked if the mode dial lock button is depressed. Each
press locks/unlocks the dial.
2
Rotate the mode dial (2) and adjust the recording mode.
[iA] Intelligent Auto mode (Intelligent Auto Mode: 101)
[P] Program AE mode (Program AE Mode: 253)
[A] Aperture-Priority AE mode (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 257)
[S] Shutter-Priority AE mode (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 260)
[M] Manual Exposure mode (Manual Exposure Mode: 263)
[] Creative Video mode (Creative Video Mode: 330)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]/
[C4]
Custom mode (
Custom Mode: 498)
(1)
(2)
3. Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
80
Camera Setting Operations
When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
(A) Front dial
(B) Rear dial
(C) Control dial
(D) [MENU/SET] button
(E) Cursor buttons
(F) Joystick
(G) Touch screen
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)(E)(F)(G)
3. Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
81
Front Dial/Rear Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Control Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
3. Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
82
Cursor Buttons
Press:
Selects an item or numeric value.
[MENU/SET] Button
Press:
Confirms a setting.
• Displays the menu during recording and playback.
3. Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
83
Joystick
The joystick can be operated in 4 directions by tilting it up, down, left and
right and by pressing the center part.
(A) Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or moves a position.
•
Place your finger on the center of the joystick before tilting. The joystick may not
work as expected when the sides are pressed.
(B) Press: Confirms a setting.
• You can register [Operation Lock] to the Fn button to disable the operations of
operating parts:
[]
[ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Operation Lock]
(
Fn Buttons: 471)
(A)
(B)
3. Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
84
Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
(A) Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen.
(B) Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.
(C) Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are
touching the touch screen.
• If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the
precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
• Touch operations can be disabled:
[]
[ ] [Touch Settings] ([Touch Settings]: 559)
(A) (B) (C)
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
85
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
≥Setting the Viewfinder: 85
≥Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 86
≥Switching the Display Information: 88
Setting the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
1 Rotate the diopter adjustment dial while looking through the viewfinder.
• Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the viewfinder.
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
86
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder
With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.
When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor (A) works and the
camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.
You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button
(B).
1
Press [LVF].
(C) Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
(D) Viewfinder display
(E) Monitor display
(A)(B) (A)
(C) (D) (E)
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
87
• The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the way
the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
• During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
does not work.
• To focus when looking through the viewfinder:
[]
[ ] [Eye Sensor AF] ([Eye Sensor AF]: 557)
• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:
[]
[ ] [Eye Sensor] ([Eye Sensor]: 587)
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
88
Switching the Display Information
1
Press [DISP.].
≥The display information is switched.
Recording Screen
Monitor
(A) With information
(B) Without information
(C) Control panel
(D) Turned off (black)
999
999
AWB
Fn
0 0
0
AFS
FINE
OFF
4:3
ISO
AUTO
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
89
Viewfinder
(E) With information
(F) Without information
• Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
This can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. (
[Level Gauge]: 573)
• Control panel operation (
Control Panel: 93)
• You can hide the control panel and black screen:
[]
[ ] [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] ([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]:
574
)
• The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not
overlap:
[]
[ ] [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 570)
999999
(E) (F)
3. Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
90
Playback Screen
(G) With information
(H) Detailed information display
*1
(I) Without information
(J) Display without blinking highlights
*2
*1 Pressing 34 switches the display information. (
Detailed information display:
731
)
*2 This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking
Highlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. (
[Blinking
Highlights]: 571
)
2022.12.1 10:002022.12.1 10:00 100-0001100-0001 1/9991/999
ISO
200
ISO
200
F
3.5
F
3.56060
±
0
±
0
200
100-0001
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2022.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
STD.
L
4:3
AWB
(G)
(H) (I) (J)
3. Basic Operations – Quick Menu
91
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1
Display the Quick menu.
≥Press [Q].
2
Select a menu item.
≥Press 3421.
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.
3. Basic Operations – Quick Menu
92
3
Select a setting item.
≥Rotate or .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item.
4
Close the Quick menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q].
•
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
• The Quick menu can be customized:
[]
[ ] [Q.MENU Settings] (Quick Menu Customization: 490)
3. Basic Operations – Control Panel
93
Control Panel
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode), the display changes to one
especially for video. (
Control Panel (Creative Video mode): 725)
1
Display the control panel.
≥Press [DISP.] several times.
2
Touch the items.
≥The setting screens for each of the items are displayed.
3
Change the setting.
Example) Changing the AF mode
≥Touch the setting item.
• Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the
settings.
3. Basic Operations – Control Panel
94
4
Touch [Set].
Steps
2
to
4
can also be changed using the following operations.
1 Press 3421 to select an item.
• Selection is also possible by rotating or .
2 Rotate to change the settings values.
• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
95
Menu Operation Methods
≥Menu operation: 95
≥[Reset]: 100
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by
touch.
Menu operation
Configuration and operation parts of the menu
The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Use the operation parts indicated below to operate the main tab, the sub tab, the page
tab, and menu items without moving to the corresponding menu levels.
• You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.
(A) Main tab ([Q] button)
(B) Sub tab ( )
(C) Menu item ( )
(D) Page tab ( )
(E) Setting item
(D)
(A) (E)(C)(B)
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
96
1
Display the menu.
≥Press .
2
Select a main tab.
≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the main tab and then pressing or .
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
97
3
Select a sub tab.
≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the sub tab and then pressing or .
•
If there are page tabs (F), then after the page tabs have finished switching,
the next sub tab is switched to.
4
Select a menu item.
≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the menu item and then pressing or .
(F)
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
98
5
Select a setting item and then confirm your selection.
≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the setting item and then pressing or .
6
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [ ] several times.
•
For details about menu items, refer to Menu Guide. (
14. Menu Guide: 507)
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
99
Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a
description about the item is displayed on the screen.
Grayed Out Menu Items
Menu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out.
If you press or while a grayed out menu item is selected, the
reason why it cannot be set is displayed.
The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the
menu item.
3. Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
100
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
•
Recording settings
• Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup], [Streaming Setup] and [Bluetooth])
• Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup], [Streaming Setup] and
[Bluetooth])
[ ] [ ] Select [Reset]
• If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
• If the setup and custom settings are reset, [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer]
in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu/[Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu is also
returned to the default setting.
• The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
• List of default settings and settings that can be reset (
List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 771
)
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
101
Intelligent Auto Mode
The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings
automatically selected by the camera.
The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings
automatically to match the subject and recording conditions.
1
Set the mode dial to [iA].
2
Aim the camera at the subject.
≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
102
3
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any
humans.
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
• Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from
appearing dark when there is a backlight.
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
103
Types of Automatic Scene Detection
: Scenes detected during picture taking
: Scenes detected during video recording
: i-Portrait
: i-Portrait & Animal
*1
: i-Scenery
: i-Macro
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
104
: i-Night Portrait
*2
: i-Night Scenery
: i-Food
: i-Sunset
: i-Low Light
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
105
:
*1 Detected when animal detection is enabled.
*2 Detected when using an external flash.
• If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).
• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
106
AF Mode
1 Changing the AF mode.
• Each press of [ ] changes the AF mode.
[ ]/[ ] ([Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect AF])
The camera detects a person’s face, eyes, and body (entire body, upper half of the
body, or head) and adjusts the focus.
When animal detection is enabled, animals, such as birds, canines (including wolves),
and felines (including lions) will also be detected.
• Each press of switches the person, animal or eye to be brought into focus. It
cannot be switched by touching.
• Animal detection will maintain the enable/disable setting selected during other than
[iA] mode.
3. Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
107
[ ] ([Tracking])
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the
subject, maintaining focusing.
1 Aim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button
halfway.
• The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or
fully.
Flash
When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate flash
mode for the recording conditions.
When Slow Sync. ([ ], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake
because the shutter speed becomes slow.
•
For information about AF modes (
[Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect
AF]: 138
, [Tracking]: 143)
• For information about external flashes (
Using an External Flash (Optional):
304
)
3. Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
108
Recording Using Touch Functions
≥Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 108
≥Touch AE: 111
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(
[Touch Settings]: 559)
3. Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
109
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch the icon.
≥The icon switches each time you touch it.
(Touch AF)
Focus on the Touched Position.
(Touch Shutter)
Record with focus on the point touched.
(OFF)
3
(When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the
subject.
3. Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
110
• When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
• Refer to “
Operations on the AF area movement screen” for information about
operations to move the AF area. (
Operations on the AF area movement
screen: 142
)
• It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position:
[]
[ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (Moving the AF
Area by Touch: 161
)
3. Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
111
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.
When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(
[Touch Settings]: 559)
AE
3. Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
112
3
Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the
brightness.
• To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
4
Touch [Set].
How to Disable Touch AE
Touch [ ].
• When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:
– [Live Cropping]
• You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you
touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
[]
[ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (Moving the AF
Area by Touch: 161
)
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
4. Image Recording – [Aspect Ratio]
114
[Aspect Ratio]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[ ] [ ] Select [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2] Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9] Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
• [16:9] and [1:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following
functions:
– 6K photo
– [Post-Focus] (when set to [6K 18M])
• A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:
[]
[ ] [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 379)
4. Image Recording – [Picture Size]
115
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture’s image size.
[ ] [ ] Select [Picture Size]
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, the [M] and [S] image sizes are indicated with [ ].
[Aspect Ratio] Picture size
[4:3]
[L] 20M
5184k3888
[M] 10.5M
3712k2784
[S] 5M
2624k1968
[3:2]
[L] 18M
5184k3456
[M] 9M
3712k2480
[S] 4.5M
2624k1752
[16:9]
[L] 15M
5184k2920
[M] 8M
3840k2160
[S] 2M
1920k1080
[1:1]
[L] 15M
3888k3888
[M] 7.5M
2784k2784
[S] 4M
1968k1968
• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Multiple Exposure]
4. Image Recording – [Picture Quality]
116
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[ ] [ ] Select [Picture Quality]
Setting File format Settings details
[FINE]
JPEG
JPEG images that give priority to image
quality.
[STD.]
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of
recordable pictures without changing the
picture size.
[RAWiFINE]
RAWiJPEG
This records RAW and JPEG images
([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.
[RAWiSTD.]
[RAW] RAW This records RAW images.
4. Image Recording – [Picture Quality]
117
• Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on
the camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
– You can process RAW images on the camera. (
[RAW Processing]: 460)
– Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to
process and edit RAW files on a PC. (
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE: 696)
– Pictures taken with [RAW] cannot be displayed enlarged to the maximum
magnification during playback.
Take pictures with [RAWiFINE] or [RAWiSTD.] if you want to check their
focus on the camera after recording.
• RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [4:3] aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [RAWiFINE] or [RAWiSTD.] on the
camera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
4. Image Recording – [Double Card Slot Function]
118
[Double Card Slot Function]
This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
[ ] [ ] Select [Double Card Slot Function]
[Recording
Method]
[Relay Rec]
Selects the priority of card slots for
recording.
[Destination Card Slot]: [ ]/
[]
Relays recording to the card in the other
card slot after the first card runs out of free
space.
[Backup Rec]
Records the same images to both cards
simultaneously.
[Allocation
Rec]
Allows you to specify the card slot to be
used for recording for different image
formats.
[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/
[6K/4K Photo Destination]/[Video
Destination]
4. Image Recording – [Double Card Slot Function]
119
Notes about relay recording
• The following video cannot be continued to be recorded on another card:
– [Loop Recording (video)]
Notes about Backup Recording
• We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
If the card Speed Class or capacity is insufficient when video recording, recording
to both cards stops.
• Backup recording is not available with the following video. They can only be
recorded on a single card:
– [Loop Recording (video)]
• When using the following combinations of cards, backup recording for videos,
6K/4K photos, and [Post-Focus] are not available:
– SD/SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card
4. Image Recording – [Folder / File Settings]
120
[Folder / File Settings]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
Folder name
(1) Folder number (3 digits, 100 to 999)
(2) 5-character user-defined segment
File name
(3) Color space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
(4) 3-character user-defined segment
(5) File number (4 digits, 0001 to 9999)
(6) Extension
100ABCDE
(1) (2)
PABC0001.MP4
(3) (5) (6)(4)
4. Image Recording – [Folder / File Settings]
121
[ ] [ ] Select [Folder / File Settings]
*1 When [Double Card Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (Slot 1)]
and [Select Folder (Slot 2)] will be displayed.
• Follow the steps on “
Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is
displayed. (
Entering Characters: 609)
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]
[Select Folder]
*1
Selects a folder for storing images.
[Create a New
Folder]
Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for
resetting the folder number is displayed.
[OK]: Increments the folder number without changing the
5-character user-defined segment ((2) above).
[Change]: Changes the 5-character user-defined segment
((2) above). This will also increment the folder number.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder Number Link]: Uses the 3-character user-defined
segment ((4) above) to set the folder number ((1) above).
[User Setting]: Changes the 3-character user-defined segment
((4) above).
4. Image Recording – [Folder / File Settings]
122
• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file
number will be assigned.
• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be
created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the
way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
• [Select Folder] is not available when [Backup Rec] in [Double Card Slot Function]
is being used.
4. Image Recording – [File Number Reset]
123
[File Number Reset]
Refresh the folder number to reset the file number to 0001.
[ ] [ ] Select [File Number Reset]
Settings: [Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
•
When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
• To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. (
Formatting Cards
(Initialization): 62
)
2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
125
Selecting the Focus Mode
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.
1
Set the focus mode lever.
[S] ([AFS])
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[C] ([AFC])
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly adjusted
according to the movement of the subject.
• This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement
prediction)
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid activating AF.
(
Record Using MF: 167)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
126
• In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is
pressed halfway:
– [ ] mode
– In low light situations
• This function is not available for Post-Focus recording.
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
128
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen, and set
using or . (
Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ ].
•
In [iA] mode, each press of [ ] switches between [ ] and [ ]. (
AF
Mode: 106
)
3
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥The AF operates.
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus icon (A) Lights Blinking
AF area (B) Green Red
AF beep Two beeps —
(A) (B)
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
129
Low illumination AF
•
In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon
is indicated as [ ].
• Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
•
If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then
Starlight AF will be activated.
When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ ], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
• Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
[AF ON] button
You can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].
LOW
STAR
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
130
• Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF
mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
• You can change the operation of AF-ON so that AF prioritizes subjects close by.
This function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the background:
[]
[ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [AF-ON : Near
Shift] (
Fn Buttons: 471)
• You can change the operation of AF-ON so that AF prioritizes subjects far away.
This function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:
[]
[ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [AF-ON : Far Shift]
(
Fn Buttons: 471)
• When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may
take some time for the camera to focus:
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
• If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
• When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
[]
[ ] [Quick AF] ([Quick AF]: 557)
• You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter button
is pressed halfway:
[]
[ ] [Half-Press Shutter] ([Half-Press Shutter]: 556)
• The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:
[]
[ ] [Beep] [AF Beep Volume]/[AF Beep Tone] ([Beep]: 588)
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
131
Magnify the AF Area Position ([AF-Point Scope])
This magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ]. (In
other AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)
You can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto
lens.
1 Register [AF-Point Scope] to the Fn button. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
2 Enlarge the AF area position by pressing and holding the Fn button.
• When the screen is enlarged, pressing the shutter button halfway re-acquires
focus in a small central AF area.
• When the screen is enlarged, turn or to adjust the magnification.
Use for more detailed adjustments.
• When the screen is enlarged, [AFC] changes to [AFS].
• When the following functions are being used, AF-Point Scope does not work:
– Video recording/[Post-Focus]
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[]
[ ] [AF-Point Scope Setting] ([AF-Point Scope Setting]: 556)
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
132
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
Select features of AF operation when recording using [AFC] that are
appropriate for the subject and scene.
Each of these features can be further customized.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFC]. (Selecting the Focus
Mode: 125
)
2
Set [AF Custom Setting(Photo)].
≥ [ ] [ ] [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1]
Basic general-purpose setting.
[Set 2]
Suggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant speed in one
direction.
[Set 3]
Suggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects may be in the
scene.
[Set 4]
Suggested for situations where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
133
Adjusting AF Custom Settings
1 Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.
2 Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.
• To reset settings to the default, press [DISP.].
3 Press or .
• When the following function is being used, [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] is not
available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.
[i]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can
bring different subjects into focus one after another.
[j]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera waits for a short period of time before
re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the
focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for
example, an object moves across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject
movement.
(When in an AF mode where the AF area uses 225-area
focusing)
[i]
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the
camera immediately switches the AF area to keep the
subject in focus.
[j]
The camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace.
Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or
by obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
5. Focus/Zoom – Using AF
134
[Moving Subject
Prediction]
Sets the level of movement prediction for changes in the speed
of subject movement.
• At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by
responding even to sudden movements of the subject.
However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight
movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.
[0]
This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in
speed.
[i1]
These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
[i2]
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
135
Selecting the AF Mode
≥[Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect AF]: 138
≥[Tracking]: 143
≥[225-Area]: 145
≥[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]/[Zone (Square)]/[Zone (Oval)]: 146
≥[1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 149
≥[Pinpoint]: 152
≥[Custom1] to [Custom3]: 155
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
1
Press [ ].
≥The AF mode selection screen appears.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
136
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ ].
[Human Detect AF]/ [Human/Animal Detect AF]
(
[Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect AF]: 138)
[Tracking]
(
[Tracking]: 143)
[225-Area]
(
[225-Area]: 145)
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]
(
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]: 146)
[Zone (Square)]
*1
(
[Zone (Square)]: 146)
[Zone (Oval)]
(
[Zone (Oval)]: 147)
[1-Area+]
(
[1-Area+]: 149)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
137
[1-Area]
(
[1-Area]: 149)
[Pinpoint]
(
[Pinpoint]: 152)
[Custom1]
*1
/ [Custom2]
*1
/ [Custom3]
*1
(
[Custom1] to [Custom3]: 155)
*1 This is not displayed with the default settings. From [Show/Hide AF Mode]
in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu, you can set the items to display on
the selection screen. (
[Show/Hide AF Mode]: 555)
• When the following function is being used, [ ] is not available.
– [Time Lapse Shot]
• When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]([Human
Detect AF]):
– [Live Cropping]
• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
• The AF mode cannot be set when using Post-Focus.
ヤヒヤビ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
138
[Human Detect AF]/[Human/Animal Detect AF]
The camera detects a person’s face, eyes, and body (entire body, upper
half of the body, or head) and adjusts the focus. With animal detection
enabled, the camera will also detect animals, such as birds, canines
(including wolves), and felines (including lions).
When the camera detects a person’s face (A)/(B) or body or an animal’s
body (C)
*1
, an AF area is displayed.
*1 When the animal detection is enabled.
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this automatically.
White
Displayed when multiple subjects are detected.
• Eye detection works only for the eyes inside the yellow frame (A).
(A) (B)
(C)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
139
Enable/Disable Animal Detection
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ] and then press 3.
• This enables animal detection, and the icon changes to [ ].
• Press 3 again to disable animal detection.
• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
• The camera can detect a combined total of up to 3 human and animal bodies.
• If any humans or animals are not detected, the camera operates as [ ].
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
140
Specify the Person, Animal, or the Person’s Eye to Bring
into Focus
When the person or animal to be brought into focus is shown using the
white AF area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.
Touch operation
Touch the person, animal or eye indicated with the white AF area.
•
The AF area will change to yellow.
• Touching outside the AF area displays the AF area setting screen. Touch [Set] to set
the [ ] AF area at the position touched.
• To cancel the setting, touch [ ].
Button operation
Press .
•
Each press of switches the person, animal or eye to be brought into focus.
• To cancel the settings specified, press .
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
141
Move and Change the Size of the Yellow AF Area
You can move the yellow AF area to the position of the white AF area and
replace the white AF area with the yellow AF area.
If moving to a position outside an AF area, then the [ ] AF area will be
set.
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ] or [ ] and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
4 Rotate , or to change the size of the AF area.
5 Press .
• On the recording screen, press , or touch [ ] to cancel the AF area
setting.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
142
Operations on the AF area movement screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves the AF area.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
/
— Enlarges/reduces the AF area.
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the AF area position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the AF area size to the
default setting.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
143
[Tracking]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of
the subject, maintaining focusing.
1
Start tracking.
≥Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button
halfway.
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is
pressed halfway or pressed fully.
•
If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.
• When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not
work.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
144
Move the Position of the AF Area
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ] and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
• You can also move the AF area by touching.
• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
4 Press .
• In [ ] mode, while recording video, and while recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/
S)], tracking will continue even if the shutter button is released.
To cancel tracking, press or , or touch [ ].
Tracking is also available with [AFS].
• Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
• In the following, [ ] operates as [ ]:
– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[L.Monochrome S] ([Photo
Style])
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky
Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
145
[225-Area]
The camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus from 225 areas.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought
into focus.
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], ensuring that the subject stays within
the 225 areas during recording will ensure the subject stays in focus.
Specify the [AFC] Start Point
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can specify at which area to start
[AFC].
1 Set the focus mode to [AFC]. (
Selecting the Focus Mode: 125)
2 Set [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] to [ON].
•
[ ] [ ] [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] [ON]
3 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
4 Select [ ] and then press 4.
• After performing Steps 1 and 2, the icon changes from [ ] to [ ].
5 Press 3421 to move the AF area to the start point.
• You can also move the AF area by touching.
• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
6 Press .
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
146
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]/[Zone (Square)]/[Zone (Oval)]
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]
Within the 225 AF areas, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
Horizontal pattern
Vertical pattern
[Zone (Square)]
Within the 225 AF areas, a central square zone can be focused.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
148
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ], [ ] or [ ] and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
• You can also move the AF area by touching.
When [ ] is selected
• Press 34 to switch to a horizontal pattern AF area.
• Press 21 to switch to a vertical pattern AF area.
4 Rotate , or to change the size of the AF area.
• You can also pinch out/pinch in the AF area to change the size.
• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center. The second
press returns the size of the AF area to the default.
5 Press .
• The display method for the AF area using 225-area focusing can be changed:
[]
[ ] [AF Area Display] ([AF Area Display]: 567)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
149
[1-Area+]/[1-Area]
[1-Area+]
Emphasis within a single AF area can be focused.
Even when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject
remains focused in a supplementary AF area (A).
•
Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [ ].
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
(A)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
150
Switching of Automatic Detection
Automatic detection is now available in the [1-Area+]/[1-Area] AF modes.
When a part of a human or animal enters the [1-Area+]/[1-Area] AF area, the
automatic detection AF area is indicated in yellow.
Eye detection works when a person’s face is inside the AF area.
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ] or [ ] and then press 3.
• Each press of 3 switches automatic detection.
• The automatic detection settings of [1-Area+] and [1-Area] are linked.
(A) Automatic detection: OFF ( / )
(B) [Human Detect AF]: ON ( / )
(C) [Human/Animal Detect AF]: ON ( / )
• Only 1 human or animal can be automatically detected in the AF area.
• You cannot change the person, animal or eye being focused on during automatic
detection.
(A) (B) (C)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
151
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ]/[ ]/[ ] or [ ]/[ ]/[ ] and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
4 Rotate , or to change the size of the AF area.
5 Press .
• For information about detailed operations to move the AF area (
Operations on
the AF area movement screen: 142
)
• Change the movement speed of a single AF area:
[]
[ ] [1-Area AF Moving Speed] ([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 524)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
152
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on a small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the
focus will be enlarged.
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
153
Move the Position of the AF Area
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select [ ] and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to set the position of [i] and then press or .
• The selected position on the screen will be enlarged.
• The AF area cannot be moved to the edge of the screen.
4 Press 3421 to fine-adjust the position of [i].
5 Press or .
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
154
Operations on the Magnification Window
•
When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3k to 10k.
• You can also take a picture by touching [ ].
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves [i].
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns to the screen in Step 3.
Second time: Returns the AF area position to the
center.
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[]
[ ] [Pinpoint AF Setting] ([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 556)
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
155
[Custom1] to [Custom3]
The shape of the AF area can be set freely in the 225 AF areas.
The set AF area can be registered using [ ] to [ ].
The AF area can also be moved while maintaining the set shape.
•
This is not displayed with default settings. In [Show/Hide AF Mode] in the
[Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu, set [Custom1] to [Custom3] to [ON]. (
[Show/
Hide AF Mode]: 555
)
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
156
Register the AF Area Shape
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select one of [ ] to [ ] and then press 3.
3 Select the AF area.
Touch operation
Touch the area to make the AF area.
• To select consecutive points, drag the screen.
• To cancel selection of the selected AF area, touch it again.
Button operation
Press 3421 to select the AF area and then set with or . (Repeat
this)
• To cancel selection of the selected AF area, press or again.
• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].
4 Press [Q].
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
157
Move the Position of the AF Area
1 Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2 Select a registered AF mode shape ([ ] to [ ]) and then press 4.
3 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area and then press .
• Press [DISP.] to return the [i] position to the center.
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
158
AF Area Movement Operation
≥Moving the AF Area by Touch: 161
≥Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad: 163
≥[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 166
In default settings, you can use the joystick to directly move and change
the size of the AF area when recording.
1
Move the position of the AF area.
≥On the recording screen, tilt the joystick.
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
159
• Pressing enables switching between the default and set AF area
positions.
In [ ]/[ ], this operation switches the person, animal or eye to be
brought into focus.
In [ ], this operation displays the enlarged screen.
2
Change the size of the AF area.
≥Rotate , or .
•
Use for more detailed adjustments.
• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center. The
second press returns the size of the AF area to the default.
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
160
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This will return you to the recording screen.
•
When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with the
AF area.
• In [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be
changed.
• In [ ], it is not possible to move the AF area or change its size.
• In the [iA] mode, the [ ]/[ ] AF area cannot be moved.
• You can set the AF area to loop when moved:
[]
[ ] [Looped Focus Frame] ([Looped Focus Frame]: 557)
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
161
Moving the AF Area by Touch
You can move the AF area to a touched position on the monitor.
You can also change the size of the AF area.
[ ] [ ] [Touch Settings] Select [Touch AF]
• The default setting is [AF].
Focus on the Touched Position ([AF])
1 Touch the subject.
• The AF area moves to the touched position.
2 Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center.
The second touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
3 Touch [Set].
• In [ ], touch [Exit].
• For [ ]/[ ], the AF area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] on the
recording screen.
[AF] This focuses on the touched subject.
[AF+AE] This focuses on and adjusts brightness for the touched subject.
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
162
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])
1 Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the brightness.
• At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as [ ] is
displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF area.
2 Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center. The second
touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
3 Touch [Set].
• The [AF+AE] area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] or [ ] is
set: [ ]) on the recording screen.
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
163
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad
During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position
and size of the AF area.
1
Set [Touch Pad AF].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]
2
Move the position of the AF area.
≥During viewfinder display, touch the monitor.
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
164
3
Change the size of the AF area.
≥Rotate , or .
•
Use for more detailed adjustments.
• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center. The
second press returns the size of the AF area to the default.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
165
Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by touching a desired
position on the touch pad.
[OFFSET1]
to
[OFFSET7]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder according to the distance
you drag your finger on the touch pad.
Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/
[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4] (lower right)/
[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/
[OFFSET7] (lower left)
[OFF] —
5. Focus/Zoom – AF Area Movement Operation
166
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
Memorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is
vertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned.
Two vertical orientations, left and right, are available.
[ ] [ ] Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal
orientations.
[OFF] Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.
• In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
• This does not work in the [ ] and [ ] to [ ] AF modes.
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
167
Record Using MF
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1
Set the focus mode lever to [MF].
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
168
2
Select the focus point.
≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus point.
•
To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press .
≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
169
4
Adjust the focus.
The operations used to focus differ depending on the lens.
When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring
Rotate to (A) side:
Focuses on nearby subject
Rotate to (B) side:
Focuses on distant subjects
When using the interchangeable lens having a focus lever
Move to (C) side:
Focuses on nearby subject
Move to (D) side:
Focuses on distant subjects
• The focusing speed varies depending on how far you move the
focus lever.
(A)(B)
(C)
(D)
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
170
When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring
Press 1: Focuses on nearby subject
Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects
• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide bar.
• This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus
Peaking)
• A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide)
(E) MF Assist (enlarged screen)
(F) Focus Peaking
(G) MF Guide
(E) (F)
(G)
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
171
5
Close the MF Assist screen.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This operation can also be performed by pressing .
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
172
Operations on the MF Assist Screen
*1 When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing 4 to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3k to 20k.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421
*1
Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.]
*1
[Reset]
*1
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
[AF ON] The AF operates.
• On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist
screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen
will be exited a short time after you cease the operation.
AF
5. Focus/Zoom – Record Using MF
173
• You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [ ].
• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. You can,
however, display MF Assist by directly operating the camera using the touch
screen or a button.
• During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.
• The recording distance reference mark indicates the position of the imaging
surface. This becomes the reference when measuring the recording distance.
• You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
[]
[ ] [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 524)
• You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal
orientations:
[]
[ ] [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] ([Focus Switching for Vert /
Hor]: 166
)
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[]
[ ] [MF Assist] ([MF Assist]: 554)
• You can change the MF Guide display units:
[]
[ ] [MF Guide] ([MF Guide]: 555)
• You can disable focus ring operation:
[]
[ ] [Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 555)
• You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
[]
[ ] [Looped Focus Frame] ([Looped Focus Frame]: 557)
• The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
[]
[ ] [Lens Focus Resume] ([Lens Focus Resume]: 580)
• The amount of focus movement can be set:
[]
[ ] [Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 581)
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
174
Recording with Zoom
≥Extended Tele Conversion: 176
≥[Power Zoom Lens]: 180
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.
When taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect
without image deterioration.
When recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same
telescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].
•
For details about [Image Area of Video] (
[Image Area of Video]: 348)
1
Perform zoom operations.
(T): Telephoto
(W): Wide-angle
Interchangeable lens with a zoom ring
Rotate the zoom ring.
(T)(W)
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
175
Interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom (electrically operated
zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies depending on how far you move the lever.)
• If you set [Zoom Control] to an Fn button, you can operate the optical zoom
slowly by pressing 21 or fast by pressing 34.
Interchangeable lens that does not support the zoom
The optical zoom is not available.
≥The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.
•
The focal length display can be hidden:
[]
[ ] [Focal Length] ([Focal Length]: 571)
(T)
(W)
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
176
Extended Tele Conversion
[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in
image quality.
•
The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture
Size] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.
– Set to [ M]: 1.4k
– Set to [ S]: 2.0k
1
Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Picture Size] [M]/[S]
2
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[ZOOM]
Changes the zoom magnification.
[TELE CONV.]
Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF]
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
177
Changing the Zoom Magnification
Button operation
1 Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
•
[ ] [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]
2 Set the Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
3 Press the Fn button.
4 Press the cursor buttons to operate the zoom.
31: T (telephoto)
24: W (wide-angle)
• Press the Fn button again, or wait a specified time to end zoom operation.
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
178
Touch operation
1 Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
•
[ ] [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]
2 Tou ch [ ].
3 Tou ch [ ].
4 Drag the slide bar to operate the zoom.
(T): Telephoto
(W): Wide-angle
• To end Touch Zoom operations, touch [ ] again.
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(
[Touch Settings]: 559)
(T)
(W)
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
179
• When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting.
• When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO] (when set to [6K 18M])
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] ([Filter Settings])
– [Post-Focus] (when set to [6K 18M])
– [Multiple Exposure]
• When the following functions are being used, [ZOOM] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Post-Focus]
5. Focus/Zoom – Recording with Zoom
180
[Power Zoom Lens]
Sets the screen display and operations when using an interchangeable
lens that is compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
• This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible.
[ ] [ ] Select [Power Zoom Lens]
[Step Zoom]
When it is set to [ON] and a zoom operation is performed,
zooming stops at each decided focal point position.
This setting does not work when recording video or 6K/4K
photos with [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not
change.
[Photo]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens
with a zoom lever and zoom ring is attached.
When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring
are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
181
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
≥Selecting the Drive Mode: 182
≥Taking Burst Pictures: 184
≥6K/4K Photo Recording: 190
≥Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File: 197
≥Post-Focus Recording: 207
≥Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 216
≥Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 221
≥Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 225
≥Recording Using the Self-timer: 227
≥Bracket Recording: 231
≥[Silent Mode]: 239
≥[Shutter Type]: 240
≥Image Stabilizer: 243
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
182
Selecting the Drive Mode
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording
conditions.
1
Rotating the drive mode dial.
[Single]
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed.
[Burst] (Taking Burst Pictures: 184)
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
[6K/4K PHOTO] (6K/4K Photo Recording: 190)
When the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are recorded with [6K/4K
PHOTO].
[Post-Focus] (Post-Focus Recording: 207)
When the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are recorded with
[Post-Focus].
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation (Recording with Time
Lapse Shot: 216
, Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 221)
Takes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
183
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 227)
Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the shutter button is pressed.
• The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn
button:
[]
[ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Drive Mode
Setting] (
Fn Buttons: 471)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
184
Taking Burst Pictures
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
185
2
Select the burst rate.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Burst Rate]
[H]
Takes high-speed burst pictures.
[M]
Takes medium-speed burst pictures.
[L]
Takes low-speed burst pictures.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
• Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
186
Burst Rate
• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
Maximum Number of Frames Recordable
• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic. (Using an UHS-II
compatible card.)
Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
• The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
Mechanical
shutter, electronic
front curtain
Electronic shutter
Live View when
taking burst
pictures
[H]
(High speed)
12 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
9 frames/second
([AFC])
12 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
7 frames/second
([AFC])
None ([AFS]/[MF])
Available ([AFC])
[M]
(Medium speed)
7 frames/second 7 frames/second Available
[L]
(Low speed)
2 frames/second 2 frames/second Available
[Picture Quality]
[FINE]/[STD.]
[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/
[RAW]
[H]
(High speed)
999 frames or more 108 frames or more
[M]
(Medium speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
187
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can
be taken continuously will appear on the recording screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
• Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
• When [r99i] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst
pictures.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
188
Focus when Taking Burst Pictures
• When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
• With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
(
[Focus/
Shutter
Priority]: 553
)
[H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFC]
[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus
[BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
Focus mode [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[AFC]
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[MF]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
189
• It may take a while to save burst pictures.
If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum
number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
• Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following functions:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star
Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
190
6K/4K Photo Recording
With 6K Photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 30 frames/
second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 18 million
pixels, extracted from their burst file.
With 4K photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 60 frames/
second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 8 million
pixels.
•
“6K PHOTO” is a high-speed burst picture function to extract and save the desired
pictures from images with an aspect ratio for pictures of 4:3 or 3:2 and an effective
picture size equivalent to the number of pixels (approx. 18 megapixels) for images of
6K size (around 6,000 widek3,000 high).
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
191
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select [Picture Size / Burst Speed].
≥ [ ] [ ] [6K/4K PHOTO] [Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
*1 Saved as 6K/4K burst files whose [Rec. File Format] is [MP4].
Picture size Burst rate [Rec Quality]
*1
[6K 18M]
[4:3]:
[3:2]:
4992k3744
5184k3456
30 frames/
second
[6K/200M/30p]
[4K H 8M]
[4:3]:
[3:2]:
[16:9]:
[1:1]:
3328k2496
3504k2336
3840k2160
2880k2880
60 frames/
second
[4K/150M/60p]
[4K 8M]
30 frames/
second
[4K/100M/30p]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
192
3
Select [Rec Method].
[ ] [ ] [ ] ([6K/4K Burst])
When you wish to capture the best moments of a fast-moving subject
Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed.
Audio recording: None
[ ] [ ] [ ] ([6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
“S/S” is an abbreviation for start/stop.
When you wish to capture an unpredictable photo opportunity
Starts taking burst pictures when the shutter button is pressed. Pressing the
button again stops taking burst pictures.
The start tone and stop tone are output.
Audio recording: Available (Audio is not played back during playback with the
camera.)
[ ] [ ] [ ] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst])
When you wish to capture at the moment of a photo opportunity
Takes burst pictures for approx. 1 second before and after the moment the
shutter button is pressed.
The shutter sound is output once only.
Recording duration: Approx. 2 seconds
Audio recording: None
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
193
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5
Start recording.
• [Continuous AF] works and the focus is adjusted continuously during
recording with AF.
[6K/4K Burst]
1 Press the shutter button halfway.
2 Press the shutter button fully and keep it pressed during recording.
(A) Press and hold
(B) Recording is performed
• Press the shutter button fully early because recording will take approx.
0.5 second to start after it is pressed fully.
(A)
(B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
194
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
1 Press the shutter button fully to start recording.
2 Press the shutter button fully again to stop recording.
(C) Start (First)
(D) Stop (Second)
(E) Recording is performed
• You can add markers by pressing [Q] during recording. (Up to 40 markers per
recording)
This allows you to skip to the positions where you added markers when
selecting pictures from a 6K/4K burst file.
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
1 Press the shutter button fully.
(F) Approx. 1 second
(G) Recording is performed
• While the recording screen is displayed, the AF will operate constantly to
continue focusing.
The exposure is also adjusted continuously, except in [M] mode.
• When the subject is not at the center, use AF/AE Lock if you wish to lock the
focus and exposure. (
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
(C) (D)
(E)
(F) (F)
(G)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
195
• In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select
pictures from a burst file will be displayed.
To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to return to the
recording screen.
For how to select and save pictures from a recorded 6K/4K burst file
(
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File: 197)
[Pre-Burst Recording] ([6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approx. 1 second before the shutter button is
pressed fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
[ ] [ ] [6K/4K PHOTO] Select [Pre-Burst Recording]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, [PRE] is displayed on the recording
screen.
• The AF behavior and functionality restrictions when using [Pre-Burst Recording] are
the same as for [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
• Setting ranges become the following with 6K/4K photo recording:
– Shutter speed: 1/30 (1/60 when [4K H 8M] is set) to 1/16000
– [Min. Shutter Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30] ([1/60] when [4K H 8M] is set)
– Exposure compensation: n3EV
• The file save method differs depending on the type of card.
– SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.
– SDXC memory card:
Files are not divided for recording.
• If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
• When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster
and the camera temperature rises. Set these settings only when recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – 6K/4K Photo Recording
196
• For 6K/4K photo, the menu items below are fixed to the following settings:
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
• With 6K/4K photo recording, the following functions are not available:
–Flash
– [Bracketing]
– Program Shift
– AF mode ( )
– [MF Assist] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
• When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may change
or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• The following functions are restricted when recording 6K/4K photos when
connected to an external device (TV, etc.) via HDMI:
– HDMI output is not possible during recording.
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst] changes to [6K/4K Burst].
– [Pre-Burst Recording] is not available.
• 6K/4K photo recording does not work while you are using the following functions:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star
Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
197
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
≥Correcting Pictures After Recording (Post-Recording Refinement): 200
≥Picture Selection Operations: 202
You can select pictures from the 6K/4K burst files and save them.
•
When continuing to select pictures from the Auto Review after recording 6K/4K
photos, start the operation from either Step
2
or
3
.
1
Select a 6K/4K burst file on the playback screen.
(
Playing Back Pictures: 444)
≥Select an image with the [ ] or [ ] icon and then press 3.
≥You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ] or
[].
•
If the images were recorded with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], proceed to Step
3
.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
198
2
Roughly select the scene.
≥Drag the slide bar (A).
•
For information about how to use the picture selection slide view screen.
(
Picture Selection Slide View Screen Operations: 202)
• If the images were recorded with [6K/4K Burst] or [6K/4K Burst(S/S)],
touching [ ] allows you to select the scene in the 6K/4K burst playback
screen. (
6K/4K Burst Playback Screen Operations: 204)
3
Select the frame to save.
≥Drag the picture selection slide view (B).
≥You can also perform the same operation by pressing 21.
• To continuously rewind or forward frame-by-frame, touch and hold [ ]/[ ].
(A)
(B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
199
4
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ] or [ ].
≥A confirmation screen appears.
•
The picture is saved in JPEG format ([FINE] picture quality).
• The recording information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO sensitivity, is also saved with the picture that is saved.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
200
Correcting Pictures After Recording
(Post-Recording Refinement)
Correcting Distortion in Pictures ([Reduce Rolling
Shutter])
When saving pictures, correct any distortion caused by the electronic
shutter (rolling shutter effect).
1 On the save confirmation screen in Step
4
(
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K
Burst File: 197
), touch [Reduce Rolling Shutter].
• If there is no effect even after using correction, after a message is displayed
advising that there is no effect, the confirmation screen returns.
2 Check the correction result and then touch [Save].
• To check the corrected and uncorrected versions of the picture, touch [Set/
Cancel].
• The angle of view may become narrower if correction is performed.
• The correction may appear unnatural due to the movement of subjects.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
201
Reducing Noise Caused by High Sensitivity ([6K/4K
PHOTO Noise Reduction])
When saving pictures, reduce the noise that occurs due to high ISO
sensitivity.
[ ] [ ] Select [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
•
This is not applied to pictures saved with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
202
Picture Selection Operations
Picture Selection Slide View Screen Operations
(A) Slide bar
(B) Picture selection slide view
(C) Position of displayed frame
(A)
(B)
(C)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
203
• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
6K/4K burst file. Touch [ ] to return to the previous operation.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
21//
Drag/
Selects a frame.
• To change the frames displayed in the picture
selection slide view, select the frame at the left/
right end and then touch [ ] or [ ].
21
Press and
hold
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds or forwards
frame-by-frame.
—
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display.
/
—
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged
display (during enlarged display).
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
[]
Displays the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
— Switches to marker operation.
—
/
Adds or deletes a marker.
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
• [ON]/[OFF] are switched.
/
/
Saves the picture.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
204
6K/4K Burst Playback Screen Operations
(A) While paused
(B) During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
1 Moves to the next marker.
2 Moves to the previous marker.
(A) (B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
205
• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
6K/4K burst file. Touch [ ] to return to the previous operation.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3 —
Performs continuous playback or pauses (during
continuous playback).
4 —
Performs continuous rewind playback or pauses
(during continuous rewind playback).
1//
—
Performs fast-forward playback or performs
frame-by-frame forwarding (while paused).
2//
—
Performs fast-rewind playback or performs
frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).
—
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display (while paused).
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display (while paused).
/
—
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged
display (during enlarged display).
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
[]
Displays the picture selection slide view screen
(while paused).
— Switches to marker operation.
—
/
Adds or deletes a marker.
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
• [ON]/[OFF] switches.
/
/
Saves the picture (while paused).
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File
206
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 6K/4K burst file all at
once.
1 Select [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
•
[ ] [ ] [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
2 Press 21 to select a 6K/4K burst file and then press or .
• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames are saved as pictures.
3 Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved all at once and then press
or .
• The pictures are saved as a group of burst pictures in JPEG format.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
1 — Moves to the next marker.
2 — Moves to the previous marker.
• To play and edit 6K burst files on a PC, you need a high-performance PC
environment.
We recommend selecting and saving pictures with the camera.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
207
Post-Focus Recording
≥Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save: 211
≥Focus Stacking: 213
Taking burst pictures with the same image quality as 6K/4K photos while
automatically changing the focus point.
You can select the focus point for the picture to save after recording.
Also Focus Stacking lets you combine images with multiple focus points.
This function is suitable for subjects that do not move.
1 Perform burst 6K/4K photo recording while automatically shifting the focus.
2 Touch the desired focus point.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
208
3 A picture with the desired focus point is made.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the image quality for [Post-Focus].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Post-Focus] [6K 18M]/[4K 8M]
•
Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
• If you are going to perform Focus Stacking after recording, we recommend using
a tripod during recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
209
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥AF detects the focus point on the screen. (Excluding the edges of
the screen)
•
If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the focus icon (A) blinks
and recording is not possible.
• Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition until
recording finishes.
(A)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
210
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
• Recording is performed while automatically changing the focus point.
When the icon (B) disappears, recording ends automatically.
• A video will be recorded with [Rec. File Format] set to [MP4]. (Audio will not
be recorded.)
• In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select
the focus point will be displayed. (
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture
to Save: 211
)
• Since recording is performed with the same image quality as 6K/4K photos,
limitations apply to recording functions and menus.
• Focus settings cannot be changed during Post-Focus recording.
• When the following functions are being used, [Post-Focus] is not available:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star
Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
9
m
59
s
(B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
211
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save
1
Select a Post-Focus image on the playback screen.
(
Playing Back Pictures: 444)
≥Select an image with the [ ] icon and then press 3.
≥You can also perform the same operation by touching the [ ]
icon.
2
Touch the focus point.
• When the point is in focus, a green frame appears.
• If there is no picture with the selected point in focus, a red frame appears.
A picture cannot be saved.
• The edge of the screen cannot be selected.
3
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ].
•
The picture is saved in JPEG format.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
212
Focus Point Selection Operations
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421/
/
Touch
Selects a focus position.
• Selection is not possible during enlarged
display.
Enlarges the display.
• During enlarged display, you can fine-adjust the
focus by dragging the slide bar.
(You can also perform the same operation by
pressing 21.)
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
[]
Switches to Focus Stacking operation. (Focus
Stacking: 213
)
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
• [ON]/[OFF] switches.
/
Saves the picture.
• You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus point.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
213
Focus Stacking
By merging multiple focus points, you can save pictures that are focused
from the foreground through to the background.
(A) Closer
(B) Focus
(C) More distant
1
Touch [ ] on the screen for selecting the focus
point. (
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to
Save: 211
)
≥You can also perform the same operation by pressing [ ].
(A) (C)(B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
214
2
Select the merging method.
[Auto Merging]
Automatically selects pictures suitable for merging and then merges them into a
single picture.
[Range Merging]
Merges pictures with selected focus points into a single picture.
3
(When [Range Merging] is selected) Touch the focus
points.
• Select at least two points.
Selected points are indicated with a green frame.
• The in-focus range between the two selected points is displayed in green.
• Ranges that cannot be selected are displayed in gray.
• To cancel the selection, touch a point with a green frame again.
• To select consecutive points, drag the screen.
$XWR0HUJLQJ
5DQJH0HUJLQJ
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Post-Focus Recording
215
4
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ].
Operations when [Range Merging] Is Selected
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421/
//
Touch Selects a point.
[]
[Set/Cancel] Sets or cancels a point.
[DISP.]
[All]
Selects all points.
(Before selecting points)
[Reset]
Cancels all selections.
(After selecting points)
/
Merges the pictures and saves the resulting
picture.
• The picture is saved in JPEG format ([FINE] picture quality), and the recording
information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO
sensitivity, of the picture with the closest point is also saved with the picture that
is saved.
• Image misalignment due to camera shake will be adjusted automatically. If
adjustments are made, the angle of view will become slightly narrower when the
pictures are merged.
• If the subject moves during recording or the distance between subjects is great,
merging may create an unnatural picture.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
216
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.
This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such
as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
• Check that the clock is set correctly. (
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for
the First Time): 70
)
• For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to
[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
217
2
Set [Mode] to [Time Lapse Shot].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Time Lapse/Animation] [Mode] [Time
Lapse Shot]
3
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Shooting Interval Setting]
[ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place.
[OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully.
[Start Time Set]: Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/[Shooting Interval]
Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken.
• [Shooting Interval] is not displayed when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to
[OFF].
[Exposure Leveling]
Adjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large changes in brightness
between adjacent frames.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
218
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the
start time is reached.
• During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain period of time.
• The recording will stop automatically.
6
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 225
)
• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. (
[Time Lapse Video]: 603)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
219
Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording
Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
• You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot
recording.
[Continue] Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause] Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
• You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End] Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
220
• Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
• Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully to
resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
• [Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO]
in [M] mode.
• [Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following functions:
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
221
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Time Lapse/Animation] [Mode] [Stop
Motion Animation]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
222
3
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Add to Picture Group]
Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have
already been recorded.
• Select an image and proceed to Step
5
.
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
223
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little.
• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them
as reference for the amount of movement.
• You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [ ] during
recording.
Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
6
Stop recording.
≥Press and then select [Time Lapse/Animation] from the
[Photo] menu to stop recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
224
7
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 225
)
• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. (
[Stop Motion Video]: 603)
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
• If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the recording
is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one
that was taken.
• [Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following functions:
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
225
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
Videos
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can
proceed to create a video.
•
Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
–
Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 216
– Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 221
• You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 603) or
[Stop Motion Video] (
[Stop Motion Video]: 603) in the [Playback] menu.
1
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen that appears
after recording.
2
Set the options for creating a video.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
226
3
Select [OK].
≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format.
[OK]
Creates a video.
[Rec Quality]
Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
• Videos cannot be created when the [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz
(CINEMA)].
• Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 29 minutes and
59 seconds.
• In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
227
Recording Using the Self-timer
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the Self-Timer time. (Setting the Self-timer Time:
229
)
• When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer
Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON].
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
•
The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
228
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).
≥After the self-timer light blinks, recording starts.
(A)
(B)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
229
Setting the Self-timer Time
When taking pictures
[ ] [ ] Select [Self Timer]
When recording videos
[ ] [ ] Select [Self Timer Setting]
*1 It will only be displayed when [Self Timer Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)])
menu is selected.
[Self Timer]
*1
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc. (Custom)
[]: Takes a picture after 10 seconds.
[]: Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after
10 seconds.
(When recording video, it will be the same operation with
[ ].)
[]: Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake caused
by pressing the shutter button.
[ ] etc. (Custom): Records after the number of seconds
registered in [Custom Time].
[SET]
[Custom Time] ([2SEC] to [10SEC])
[Display Countdown] ([ON]/[OFF])
[Display Countdown]: Sets whether or not
to display the count down on the recording
screen when [Self Timer] is set to custom.
[Self Timer For
Video]
*1
[ON]
*1
/[OFF]
*1
Sets whether or not to enable self timer during video recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
230
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])
– [Bracketing]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
231
Bracket Recording
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
1
Set [Bracketing Type].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Bracketing] [Bracketing Type]
•
Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:
– [A] mode
– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
• White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white
balance is set to [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
1 2 3 4
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
232
2
Set [More Settings].
≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Focus on the subject and then take pictures.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
233
Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])
How to Cancel Bracketing
Select [OFF] in Step
1
.
[]Exposure Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the exposure. ([More
Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 235
)
[]Aperture Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the aperture value.
(
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 236)
[]Focus Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the focus point. ([More
Settings] (Focus Bracket): 237
)
[]
White Balance
Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed once, the
camera automatically records three images with
the different white balance adjustment values.
(
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 238)
[]
White Balance
Bracket (Color
Temperature)
When the shutter button is pressed once, the
camera automatically records three images with
the different white balance color temperatures.
(
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature)): 238
)
[OFF] —
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
234
• White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not
available when using the following functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
–[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Filter Settings]
• Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star
Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
235
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record
7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot
Setting]
[]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is
pressed.
[]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter
button is pressed once.
• The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is
taken.
• When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected exposure
compensation value.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
236
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0 (H-ES12060)
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image, (3) 3rd image ... (7) 7th image
[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately
setting the aperture value in the sequence of one before and
then one after using the initial aperture value as the reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
(1) (7)(5)(6) (4) (3)(2)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
237
[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)
Example when [Sequence]: [0/s/r] is set
Example when [Sequence]: [0/r] is set
(A) Focus: closer
(B) Focus: more distant
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image ... (5) 5th image ...
[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
• The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if
the initial focus point is close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
• This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/s/r]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the
sequence of forward and then backward using the initial focus
point as the reference.
[0/r]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side
using the initial focus point as the reference.
• Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
・・・・・・
(A) (B)
(1)(2) (3) (5)(4)
・・・
(A) (B)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
238
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)
1 Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press or .
Horizontal direction ([A] - [B])
Vertical direction ([G] - [M])
• The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature))
1 Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press or .
• The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
239
[Silent Mode]
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist
light will be set to forced off mode.
•
The following settings are fixed:
– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)
– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [AF Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
[ ] [ ] Select [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:
– Status indicator
– Charging light/NETWORK connection lamp
– Card access light
– Self-timer light
• Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy,
portrait, and other rights of subjects.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
240
[Shutter Type]
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
[ ] [ ] Select [Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the
recording conditions and shutter speed.
[MECH.] Records with the mechanical shutter type.
[EFC] Records with the electronic front curtain type.
[ELEC.] Records with the electronic shutter type.
[ELEC.+NR]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
When pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is
closed after recording to perform long shutter noise reduction.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
241
*1 This setting is available only in [M] mode.
*2 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in
[Beep] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (
[Beep]: 588)
• The electronic front curtain type reduces blur caused by the shutter because the
amount of vibration from the shutter is small compared to the mechanical shutter
type.
• The electronic shutter type allows you to record without vibration from the shutter.
Mechanical
shutter type
Electronic front
curtain type
Electronic shutter
type
Mechanism
This type starts and
ends exposure with
the mechanical
shutter.
This type starts
exposure
electronically and
ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
This type starts and
ends exposure
electronically.
Flash —
Shutter speed
(sec.)
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
*1
,
60 to 1/8000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
*1
,
60 to 1/2000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
60 seconds)
*1
,
60 to 1/16000
Shutter sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
*2
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
242
• To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few seconds
after the shutter button is pressed:
[]
[ ] [Shutter Delay] ([Shutter Delay]: 529)
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic
shutter type.
• When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject may
appear distorted in the picture.
• When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a case, lowering the
shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• When [Silent Mode] is being used, [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ELEC.].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
243
Image Stabilizer
≥Image Stabilizer Settings: 246
This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens
image stabilizer.
Compatible with the Dual I.S. method, which effectively combines two
image stabilizers, and the Dual I.S.2 method, which has a higher stabilizing
effect.
Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
244
Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of May 2021)
Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached
lens.
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer (Image Stabilizer Settings: 246) can be used
with any lenses.
Attached lens
Available image
stabilizer
Example of icon
Panasonic lenses compatible
with Dual I.S. Mode
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds System standard)
• If the [ ] or [ ]
icon is not displayed on the
recording screen even when a
compatible lens is used,
update the lens firmware to
the latest version.
(
Firmware of Your Camera/
Lens: 19
)
BodyrLens
(Dual I.S./Dual I.S.2)
/
Lenses compatible with the
image stabilizer function
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds System standard)
Body or Lens
Lenses without image
stabilizer
Body
Lenses without
communication function
Body
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
245
Using the Image Stabilizer
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].
• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera,
after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens
information is displayed.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length and
lens name be set to match the attached lens.
Follow the message to make the settings.
This can also be set using the menu. (
[Lens Information]: 249)
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon [ ]
may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the Shutter
Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
• We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
• The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this
camera, you can hide the message asking for confirmation of the lens
information that is displayed after turning on the camera:
[]
[ ] [Lens Info. Confirmation] ([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 582)
• You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:
[]
[ ] [I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 572)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
246
Image Stabilizer Settings
Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
[ ] [ ] Select [Image Stabilizer]
[Operation
Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording
method (normal, panning). (
[Operation Mode]: 247)
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
Camera shake during video recording is corrected along the
vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes through the
combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image
stabilizers. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
• The [ ] on the recording screen changes to [ ] while
[E-Stabilization (Video)] is functioning.
• The angle of view may become narrower if set to [ON].
[Boost I.S.
(Video)]
Increases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video
recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want
to perform recording from a fixed perspective. (
[Boost I.S.
(Video)]: 248
)
[Anamorphic
(Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording. (
[Anamorphic (Video)]: 248)
[Lens
Information]
When using a lens that does not have a communication function
with the camera, register the lens information in the camera.
(
[Lens Information]: 249)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
247
[Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
•
The [Operation Mode] that can be used differ depending on the lens used.
• When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].
• When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
– [ ] mode
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
• When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [Variable Frame Rate]
– [Live Cropping]
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera
shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning (Left/
Right)]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[Panning (Up/
Down)]
Corrects horizontal camera shake.
This is suitable for vertical panning.
[OFF] Turns the image stabilization function OFF.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
248
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to
perform recording from a fixed perspective.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the
camera.
To set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
• Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
Settings:
[]([2.0k])/[ ]([1.8k])/[ ]([1.5k])/[ ]([1.33k])/[ ]([1.30k])/
[OFF]
•
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
• While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the
image stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [ ] and [ ].
• When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.
• Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the image
stabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
249
[Lens Information]
Register the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the
camera.
Match the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you
register.
1 Press 34 to select the lens information to use and then press or .
• In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of
between 24 mm and 135 mm is registered.
The lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
250
Registering, modifying, and deleting lens information
1 Press 34 to select the lens information and then press [DISP.].
• If lens information that has not been registered is selected, press or
to proceed to Step 3.
2 Press 34 to select [Edit] or [Delete] and then press or .
• The lens information is deleted when you select [Delete].
• You cannot delete the lens information for a lens that is being used.
3 Enter the lens Information.
• The lens information changes if the lens information has already been
registered.
[Focal Length]
Enter the focal length.
• The live view images can be enlarged for display when you rotate or
.
[Lens Name]
Register the lens.
• For information on how to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• Up to a maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
4 (If lens information that has not been registered is selected) Press [DISP.] to
register the lens information.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
252
[Metering Mode]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
[ ] [ ] Select [Metering Mode]
[](Multi-metering)
Method in which the most suitable exposure is
measured by judging the allocation of brightness
on the whole screen.
[](Center-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which
focuses on the center of the screen.
[](Spot)
Method used to measure the extremely small part
around the spot-metering target (A).
• When you move the AF area, the spot metering
target also moves to match.
[](Highlight-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which
focuses on the highlighted parts of the screen to
prevent overexposure.
This is suitable for theater photography, etc.
• The standard value for correct exposure can be adjusted:
[]
[ ] [Exposure Offset Adjust.] ([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 550)
(A)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
253
Program AE Mode
In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to [P].
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
254
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the
recording screen.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value and shutter speed
blink red.
3
Start recording.
(A) Shutter speed
(B) Aperture value
(A) (B)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
255
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by
decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.
1 Press the shutter button halfway.
• This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
2 Rotate or while the values are displayed.
• This displays the Program Shift icon (C) on the recording screen.
3 Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift
•
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
• Rotate or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
(C)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
256
• Program Shift is not available when using the following functions:
–Flash
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
• You can customize dial operations:
[]
[ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] ([Dial
Set.]: 562
)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
[]
[ ] [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 571)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
257
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
Smaller aperture values
It becomes easier to defocus the background.
Larger aperture values
It becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
258
1
Set the mode dial to [A].
2
Set the aperture value.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
259
Depth of Field Characteristics
Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Depth of field
(area in sharp focus)
Shallow (narrow)
Example: When you want
to take a image with a
defocused background.
Deep (wide)
Example: When you want
to take a image with focus
as far as the background.
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (
Preview Mode:
267
)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A] mode
to check the depth of field while recording:
[]
[ ] [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 565)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
• You can customize dial operations:
[]
[ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] ([Dial
Set.]: 562
)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
[]
[ ] [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 571)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
260
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Slower shutter speeds
It becomes easier to capture motion.
Faster shutter speeds
It becomes easier to freeze motion.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
261
1
Set the mode dial to [S].
2
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
262
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (
Preview Mode:
267
)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 311)
• You can customize dial operations:
[]
[ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] ([Dial
Set.]: 562
)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
[]
[ ] [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 571)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
263
Manual Exposure Mode
In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can take pictures by manually
setting the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1
Set the mode dial to [M].
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
264
2
Set the aperture value and shutter speed.
≥Rotate to set the aperture value, and to set the shutter
speed.
3
Start recording.
(A) Shutter speed
(B) Aperture value
• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)
• [MECH.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000
• [EFC]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000
• [ELEC.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/16000
(A) (B)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
265
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (
Preview Mode:
267
)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to
constantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of the
subject while recording:
[]
[ ] [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 565)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 311)
• You can customize dial operations:
[]
[ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] ([Dial
Set.]: 562
)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
[]
[ ] [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 571)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
266
Manual Exposure Assist
When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
standard exposure (n0) measured by the camera.
•
Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
[B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the
shutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes)
The shutter closes when the shutter button is released.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
•
We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2:
optional) during bulb recording.
• Bulb recording may create noticeable noise.
If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Exposure
NR] (
[Long Exposure NR]: 519) to [ON] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu
before recording.
• Bulb is not available when using the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])
– [Bracketing]
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
267
Preview Mode
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically
closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual
recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
•
Use the Fn button registered with [Preview] to operate. In default settings, this is
registered in the [Fn2] button.
For information about the Fn button (
Fn Buttons: 471)
1
Press the preview button.
• Each press of the button switches between the effect preview screens.
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: ON
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
268
• It is possible to record in preview mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000 of a second.
• Preview mode is not available when recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
• Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that
cannot be displayed.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
269
Exposure Compensation
You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure
determined by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of n5EV.
When recording videos or recording with 6K/4K photo or Post-Focus, the
range changes to n3EV.
1
Press [ ].
2
Compensate the exposure.
≥Rotate , , or .
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
270
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
• In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to
[AUTO].
• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds n3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
• The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.
• The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
[]
[ ] [Exposure Offset Adjust.] ([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 550)
• You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is
turned off:
[]
[ ] [Exposure Comp. Reset] ([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 551)
• You can change the operation of the [ ] button:
[]
[ ] [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] ([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 561)
• Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the exposure
compensation screen:
[]
[ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] ([Exposure Comp. Disp.
Setting]: 561
)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
271
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1
Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the
Fn button. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
• These cannot be registered to [Fn3] to [Fn7].
[AE LOCK]
The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK]
The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
272
2
Lock focus and exposure.
≥Press and hold the Fn button.
≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon will be displayed.
≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon will be displayed.
(A) AF lock icon (AFL)
(B) AE lock icon (AEL)
3
Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and
then perform recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
• In the [M] mode, the AE Lock can be used when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
• You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
[]
[ ] [AF/AE Lock Hold] ([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 553)
(A)(B)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
273
ISO Sensitivity
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).
With the default settings, you can set 200 to 25600 in 1/3 EV increments.
1
Press [ISO].
2
Select ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate , , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ISO].
2
2
2
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
274
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity
By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places
to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also
increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
275
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)
*1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].
*2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– [High Dynamic] ([Filter Settings]): Fixed to [AUTO]
– Other than [High Dynamic] ([Filter Settings]): Up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [Multiple Exposure]: Down to a lower limit of [200], up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [200]
– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [400]
– [Hybrid Log Gamma] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [400]
– [ ] mode, [6K/4K PHOTO], [Post-Focus]: Up to an upper limit of [12800]
• During video recording, the camera operates as [AUTO]. (When not in [ ] mode)
[AUTO]
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
• Taking picture: Maximum [3200]
*1
• Video recording: Maximum [6400]
*2
[200] to [25600]
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
• You can extend the ISO sensitivity lower limit to [100] by
setting [Extended ISO] (
[Extended ISO]: 550) to [ON] in the
[Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
276
• You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
–[ ]
[ ] [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] ([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 520)
–[ ]
[ ] [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ([ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 362)
• You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
[]
[ ] [ISO Increments] ([ISO Increments]: 549)
• The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:
[]
[ ] [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 550)
• You can change the ISO sensitivity setting method when recording video in [P]/
[A]/[S]/[M] modes from automatic to manual:
[]
[ ] [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]:
551
)
• You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
[]
[ ] [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 520)
• You can change the operation of the [ISO] button:
[]
[ ] [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] ([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 561)
• You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:
[]
[ ] [ISO Displayed Setting] ([ISO Displayed Setting]: 561)
• You can change the units for sensitivity to dB when recording video:
[]
[ ] [SS/Gain Operation] ([SS/Gain Operation]: 370)
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
278
White Balance (WB)
≥Adjusting the White Balance: 283
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1
Press [WB].
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
279
2
Select the white balance.
≥Rotate , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [WB].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
280
Setting Items (White Balance)
*1 It operates as [AWB] during video recording or when recording with [6K/4K
PHOTO] or [Post-Focus].
[AWB] Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[] Clear sky
[] Cloudy sky
[] Shade under a clear sky
[] Incandescent light
[]
*1
Flash
[] to []Set mode 1 to 4 (Registering the White Set: 282)
[] to []Color temperatures 1 to 4 (Color Temperature Setting: 282)
1 4
1 4
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
281
KlKelvin Color Temperature
(1) [AWB] will work within this range.
(2) Blue sky
(3) Cloudy sky (Rain)
(4) Shade
(5) Sunlight
(6) White fluorescent light
(7) Incandescent light bulb
(8) Sunrise and sunset
(9) Candlelight
• Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ ] to [ ].
• The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
• You can change the operation of the [WB] button:
[]
[ ] [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] ([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 561)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(4)
(3)
(2)
1
4
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
282
Registering the White Set
Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
3 Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center
of the screen and then press or .
• This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
Color Temperature Setting
Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
• The color temperature setting screen is displayed.
3 Press 34 to select the color temperature and then press or .
• You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating ,
or . (
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)):
238
)
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
1
4
1
4
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
283
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not
produced by the selected white balance.
1
Press [WB].
2
Select the white balance and then press 4.
≥The adjustment screen is displayed.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
284
3
Adjust the coloring.
2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
•
You can also touch the graph to make adjustments.
• Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.
• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating , or .
(
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 238)
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
• When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [i], while adjusting toward the [M] side
will display [j].
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
285
[Photo Style]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
[ ] [ ] Select [Photo Style]
≥You can also display the setting screen of [Photo Style] by pressing [ ].
[Standard] The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality
with higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with
lower contrast.
[L.ClassicNeo]
A setting for a film-like effect that has a
nostalgic, soft coloring.
[Flat]
A setting that produces a flatter image quality
with lower saturation and contrast.
[Landscape]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue
skies and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy
and beautiful skin tone.
[Monochrome] A monochrome setting with no color shades.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
286
[L.Monochrome]
A black-and-white setting with rich gradation
and crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a
dynamic impression with enhanced highlights
and shadows.
[L.Monochrome S]
A setting for a black and white effect with a
gentle touch suited to portraits.
[Cinelike D2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing
touch using a gamma curve and gives priority
to the dynamic range.
• This function is suitable for video editing
processes.
[Cinelike V2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing
touch using a gamma curve that gives priority
to the contrast.
[Like709]
A setting that minimizes overexposure by
applying a gamma curve correction
equivalent to Rec.709 to perform
compression (knee adjustment) of
high-luminance areas.
• Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R
Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high definition broadcasting.
[V-Log L]
Gamma curve setting intended for post
production processing.
• It allows you to add rich gradation to
images during post production editing.
[Hybrid Log Gamma]
A setting for recording motion pictures with a
wide dynamic range in HLG format. (HLG
Videos: 400
)
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
287
*1 Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings. You
can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in [Photo
Style Settings]. (
[Photo Style Settings]: 549)
[MY PHOTO STYLE 1]
*1
to
[MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
*1
Adjusts the image quality of Photo Style items
to your preferred settings and registers these
as My Photo Style items. (
Registering
Settings in My Photo Style: 292
)
• In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.
– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another
recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
• The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to
the following: (
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity): 275)
– [Like709], [V-Log L], [Hybrid Log Gamma]
• You can set the knee mode with [Like709]. (
Recording While Controlling
Overexposure (Knee): 360
)
• When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
• You can make detailed Photo Style settings:
[]
[ ] [Photo Style Settings] ([Photo Style Settings]: 549)
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
288
Adjusting Image Quality
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
• Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
3 Press or .
• When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
-
5
-
5
00
+5+5
6WDQGDUG
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
289
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation] Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone] Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
[Hue]
Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the
hue toward violet/magenta or yellow/green to adjust the
coloring of the entire image.
[Filter Effect]
[Yellow]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak)
Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium)
Records the sky with a darker blue.
[Red]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong)
Records the sky with a much darker blue.
[Green]
Skin and lips of people appear in natural
tones. Green leaves appear brighter and
more enhanced.
[Off] —
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/
[Standard]/
[High]
Sets the grain effect level.
[Off] —
[Color Noise] Color can be added with a grainy texture.
[Sharpness] Adjusts the outlines in the image.
S
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
290
*1 Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] are selected:
[]
[ ] [Photo Style Settings] [My Photo Style Settings] [Add
Effects]
[Sensitivity]/[White Balance] [ON]
[Noise
Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
• Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture
resolution.
[Sensitivity]
*1
Sets the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 273)
[White
Balance]
*1
Sets the white balance. (
White Balance (WB): 278)
• While [WB] is selected, press [ ] to display the
white balance setting screen.
Press [ ] again to return to the original screen.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
291
• The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
*2 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
——
——
——
([Saturation])
— —
([Color Tone])
—— ——
— —
—— ——
— ——
—
*2
———
• The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the
recording screen.
• [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] are not available when using the following
functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
S
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Photo Style]
292
Registering Settings in My Photo Style
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Adjust the image quality.
• My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality
adjustment.
Select the base Photo Style.
3 Press [DISP.].
4 (When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)
Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press or .
5 Press 34 to select the registration destination number and then press or
.
• A confirmation screen will be displayed.
On the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.
Up to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style
1 Select any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10].
2 Press [DISP.] and then set the item.
• [Load Preset Setting]
• [Save Current Setting]
• [Edit Title]
• [Restore to Default]
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
293
[Filter Settings]
≥[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 302
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).
You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
1
Set the [Filter Effect].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Filter Settings] [Filter Effect] [SET]
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
294
2
Select the filter.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample
picture.
•
Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display, guide
display, and list display.
The guide display shows the description of each filter.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
295
Adjusting the Filter Effect
You can adjust the filter effect.
1 Select the filter.
2 On the recording screen, press [WB].
3 Rotate , or to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [WB] again.
• When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [¢].
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
296
Filter Items that can be adjusted
[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Monochrome] Coloring
[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast
[Rough Monochrome] Grittiness
[Silky Monochrome] Defocus level
[Impressive Art] Vividness
[High Dynamic] Vividness
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Toy Effect] Coloring
[Toy Pop] Area with reduced peripheral brightness
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
[Miniature Effect] Vividness
[Soft Focus] Defocus level
[Fantasy] Vividness
[Star Filter]
Short rays/Long rays
Few rays/Many rays
Rotate to left/Rotate to right
[One Point Color] Amount of color left
[Sunshine] Coloring
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
297
Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
1 Tou ch [ ] .
2 Touch the item to set.
[ ]: Filter on/off
[ ]: Filter
[ ]: Filter effect adjustment
• The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(
[Touch Settings]: 559)
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
298
• White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [ ] (Forced
Flash Off).
• The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [3200].
• When [High Dynamic] is set, the ISO sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
• Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
• [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine]
are not available when using the following function:
– [ ] mode
• When [Image Area of Video] is [PIXEL/PIXEL], recording video with [Toy Effect]/
[Toy Pop] is not possible.
• [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following functions:
– [Multiple Exposure]
– [Live Cropping]
• When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
299
Setting the Type of Defocus ([Miniature Effect])
1 Set [Filter Effect] to [Miniature Effect].
2 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3 Press 34 or 21 to move the in-focus portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the screen.
• You can also switch the defocus orientation by touching [ ].
4 Rotate , or to change the size of in-focus portion.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the
screen.
• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].
5 Press or to set.
• No audio is recorded in videos.
• When the system frequency is set to [59.94Hz (NTSC)], the length of the video
recorded will be approx. 1/10 of the actual recording time. The displayed video
recording time will be approx. 10 times longer than the recording time displayed
during normal video recording.
When the system frequency is set to [50.00Hz (PAL)] or [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], the
length of the video recorded will be approx. 1/8 of the actual recording time. The
displayed video recording time will be approx. 8 times longer than the recording
time displayed during normal video recording.
• If you end video recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for
a certain period.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
300
Setting the Color to Be Left ([One Point Color])
1 Set [Filter Effect] to [One Point Color].
2 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3 Press 3421 to move the frame and select the color you want to leave.
• You can also select the color you want to leave by touching the screen.
• To return the frame back to the center, press [DISP.].
4 Press or to set.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
301
Setting the Light Source Position and Size ([Sunshine])
1 Set [Filter Effect] to [Sunshine].
2 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3 Press 3421 to move the center position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
4 Rotate , or to adjust the size of the light source.
• This can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].
5 Press or to set.
8. White Balance/Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
302
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
[ ] [ ] [Filter Settings] Select [Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– Burst recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
–[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Bracketing]
9. Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
304
Using an External Flash (Optional)
≥Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 305
If you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash.
You can also use a commercially available external flash by connecting a
synchro cable to the flash synchro socket.
Furthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash
recording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position
separate from the camera.
•
Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting.
• Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
9. Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
305
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.
Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to
attach it.
1
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction
indicated by arrow (2) while pressing it in the direction
indicated by arrow (1).
(1)
(2)
9. Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
306
Connecting a Synchro Cable to the Flash Synchro Socket
You can use a commercially available external flash by connecting a
synchro cable to the flash synchro socket.
1 Rotate the flash synchro socket cap in the direction of the arrow to remove.
• Be careful not to lose the flash synchro socket cap.
2 Connect the synchro cable to the flash synchro socket.
• The socket has a lock screw to prevent the cable from falling off.
• For the connection, refer to the operating instructions for the synchro cable.
• Use an external flash with a synchronization voltage of 400 V or less.
• Do not use the synchro cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
• The flash synchro socket has no polarity. You can use a synchro cable
regardless of its polarity.
9. Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
307
Notes on Flash Recording
• Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to
deform or discolor.
• If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.
While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.
• When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only the
external flash. It may become detached.
• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with
reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the external flash for details.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
309
[Flash Mode]
Sets the flash mode.
1
[ ] [ ] Select [Flash Mode]
[ ] (Forced Flash On)/[ ] (Forced On/Red-Eye)
The flash fires every time regardless of the recording conditions.
This is suitable for recording when there is backlighting or under lighting such
as fluorescent lighting.
[ ] (Slow Sync.)/[ ] (Slow Sync./Red-Eye)
When recording images against a nightscape, this will slow the shutter speed
when the flash fires to make not only the subject but also the nightscape appear
brighter.
• Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images. To avoid this, we
recommend using a tripod.
[ ] (Forced Flash Off)
The flash does not fire.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
310
Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
(: Available, —: Not available)
•
The flash fires twice.
The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [ ] or [ ]
is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished.
• [ ] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the
external flash.
• The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject and
whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash is fired,
may not be very noticeable in some cases.
Recording
mode
[] [] [] [] []
[P]/[A]
[S]/[M] ——
• [ ] and [ ] can be set in [iA] mode. In [ ], the flash mode switches to one
suited to the recording situation.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
311
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes
[ ]/[ ]: 1/60 of a second
*1
to 1/250 of a second
[ ]/[ ]: 1 second to 1/250 of a second
*1 In [S] mode, this will be 60 seconds and in [M] mode it will be [B] (Bulb).
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]
You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
1
Set the [Firing Mode].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Firing Mode]
[TTL]
Sets flash output to be set automatically by the camera.
• The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other
manufacturers are attached.
Set on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) is attached.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
312
[MANUAL]
Sets the flash output manually.
• With [TTL], you can record the images you want even when recording dark
scenes where the flash output tends to become greater.
• The flash output ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
2
(When set to [MANUAL]) Select [Manual Flash Adjust.]
and then press or .
3
Press 21 to set the flash output and then press or
.
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
313
[Flash Adjust.]
You can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL
output mode.
1
Select [Flash Adjust.].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Flash Adjust.]
2
Press 21 to adjust the flash output and then press
or .
• It can be adjusted within the range of [j3 EV] to [i3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
315
[Flash Synchro]
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,
a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a
trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately
before the shutter closes.
1
[ ] [ ] Select [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
This is the normal method for recording with the Flash.
[2ND]
The light source appears behind the subject and the picture becomes dynamic.
9. Flash – Setting Flash
316
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure
compensation value. (
Exposure Compensation: 269)
1
[ ] [ ] Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.
• When [Wireless] is set to [ON], this is fixed to [1ST].
• The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
317
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to record using a wireless flash.
You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
318
Placing a Wireless Flash
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Placement example
When (C) is placed to erase the shadow in the background of the subject that the flash
groups (A) and (B) will create
Placement range
When DMW-FL360L is attached
(D) 5.0 m (16 feet)
(E) 7.0 m (23 feet)
(C)
(B)
(A)
(D)
(D)
(E)
(E)
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
319
1
Attach an external flash to the camera. (Removing the
Hot Shoe Cover: 305
)
2
Set the wireless flashes to [RC] mode and then place
them.
• Set the channel and group for the wireless flashes.
• The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera held
horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding environment.
• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
• If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering
the output with a diffuser or similar device. (
[Communication Light]: 323)
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
320
3
Enable the wireless flash function of the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wireless] [ON]
4
Set [Wireless Channel].
• Select the same channel as on the wireless flash side.
5
Set [Wireless Setup].
• Set the firing mode and flash output.
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
321
Setting Items ([Wireless Setup])
• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
[External
Flash]
*1
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the
flash output.
[AUTO]
*2
: Sets the flash output on the
external flash side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
external flash manually.
[OFF]: The external flash outputs only
communication light.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the external flash
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the external flash
when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
322
*1 This cannot be selected when [Wireless FP] is set.
*2 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the
flash output.
[AUTO]
*1
: Sets the flash output on the
wireless flash side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
wireless flash manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified
group will not fire.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the wireless flash
when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
9. Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
323
[Wireless FP]
The external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the
flash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even
at fast shutter speeds.
[ ] [ ] Select [Wireless FP]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Communication Light]
Set the strength of communication light.
[ ] [ ] Select [Communication Light]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
324
10. Recording Videos
≥Recording Videos: 325
≥Creative Video Mode: 330
≥Video Recording Settings: 335
≥Time Code: 350
≥Using AF (Video): 353
≥Video Brightness and Coloring: 356
≥Audio Settings: 364
≥Main Assist Functions: 369
≥[Variable Frame Rate]: 382
≥[Focus Transition]: 386
≥[Live Cropping]: 390
≥Log Recording: 396
≥HLG Videos: 400
≥Anamorphic Recording: 405
≥[Synchro Scan]: 410
≥[Loop Recording (video)]: 412
≥[Segmented File Recording]: 414
≥List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
416
10. Recording Videos – Recording Videos
325
Recording Videos
≥Recording Videos: 325
It is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 6K-A
(4992k3744) on this camera.
It also supports switching of the system frequency and 2 types of recording
file format; MP4, and MOV.
In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode), which is specifically for video
recording, you can use all of the video functions.
Recording Videos
1
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
Release the video rec. button right after you press it.
2
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button again.
10. Recording Videos – Recording Videos
326
Screen Displays While Video Recording
The live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video
recording, and video recording time (A) and elapsed recording time (B) are
displayed.
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• The recording state indication (C) and card access indication (D) turn red while
videos are being recorded.
• If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
(C) (A)(D)(B)
10. Recording Videos – Recording Videos
327
Exposure Control While Video Recording
Videos will be recorded using the aperture, shutter speed, and ISO
sensitivity settings below.
Recording
mode
Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
[iA]
The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
(
Types of Automatic Scene Detection: 103)
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
The settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is
[ON]. (
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 551)
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with manually set values.
[] Records with manually set values.
10. Recording Videos – Recording Videos
328
Size Interval for Dividing Files
[Rec. File Format] [Rec Quality] Size interval for dividing files
[MP4]
[FHD]
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size
exceeds 4 GB.
[4K]
When using an SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size
exceeds 4 GB.
[MOV] All
When using an SDXC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or
the file size exceeds 96 GB.
10. Recording Videos – Recording Videos
329
• If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video
recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
• The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
• If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button or sub video rec. button to
end recording bothers you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.
– Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for recording.
• Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a while
after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
• Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may occur
where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not displayed
correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
• If the camera temperature rises, [ ] may be displayed and recording may stop.
Wait until the camera cools down.
• Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine]
([Filter Settings])
– [Post-Focus]
• You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with
the [ ] mode:
[]
[ ] [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 577)
• You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video is
being recorded:
[]
[ ] [Red REC Frame Indicator] ([Red REC Frame Indicator]:
578
)
10. Recording Videos – Creative Video Mode
330
Creative Video Mode
≥Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 331
≥Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 334
The [ ] mode (Creative Video mode) is a recording mode specifically
for video recording in which you can use all video functions.
In the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video
recording with the shutter button.
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Settings such as exposure and white balance can be changed
independent of picture taking settings.
10. Recording Videos – Creative Video Mode
331
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the exposure mode.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Exposure Mode] [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
•
You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
10. Recording Videos – Creative Video Mode
332
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).
5
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button again.
(A)
(B)
10. Recording Videos – Creative Video Mode
333
Operations During Video Recording
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
1 Tou ch [ ] .
2 Touch an icon.
: Zoom (When using an interchangeable lens supporting power zoom)
: Aperture value
: Shutter speed
: Exposure compensation
/ : ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB)
: Sound recording level adjustment
3 Drag the slide bar to set the item.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
• If you touch icon (C), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(
[Touch Settings]: 559)
F
SS
ISO
GAIN
(C)
10. Recording Videos – Creative Video Mode
334
Separating Settings for Recording Video and
Pictures
In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed
in [ ] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
modes.
From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings
for video recording and for picture recording.
[ ] [ ] Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]
[ ]: The recording settings are linked across
recording modes.
[ ]: Recording settings can be separated by
the [ ] mode and the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] mode.
[White Balance]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[AF Mode]
• The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically,
so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made
with this function.
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
335
Video Recording Settings
≥[System Frequency]: 336
≥[Rec. File Format]: 337
≥[Rec Quality]: 338
≥[Image Area of Video]: 348
This section describes the settings used when video recording.
•
In “
4. Image Recording”, the functions described work with both pictures and
video.
Please also refer to that section.
–
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118
– [Folder / File Settings]: 120
– [File Number Reset]: 123
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
336
[System Frequency]
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played
back with the camera.
The default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV
broadcast system for the region where the camera was bought.
[ ] [ ] Select [System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
System frequency for regions using the NTSC
broadcasting system
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
System frequency for regions using the PAL
broadcasting system
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] System frequency for producing cinema film
• After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.
• If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system
of your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your
TV.
We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are
unsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing
cinema film.
• A video recorded with a system frequency different from the setting of [System
Frequency] cannot be played back in the camera.
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
337
[Rec. File Format]
Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.
[ ] [ ] Select [Rec. File Format]
[MP4] This file format is suitable for playback on PCs.
[MOV] This file format is suitable for image editing.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], it is fixed to [MOV].
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
338
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
The image qualities you can select depend on the [System Frequency] and
[Rec. File Format] settings.
[Rec Quality] settings can also be made using [Filtering] (
[Filtering]: 345)
to display only items that meet your conditions and [add to list] ([add to
list]: 346
) to register recording qualities you use often.
[ ] [ ] Select [Rec Quality]
• To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, it requires a card with the
corresponding Speed Class. (
Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25)
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
339
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
• Image compression: Long GOP
• Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) YUV/bit
(D) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Resolution
(Aspect ratio)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
3840k2160
(16:9)
59.94p 100 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 29.97p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/30p] 29.97p 72 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 23.98p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/24p] 23.98p 72 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
1920k1080
(16:9)
59.94p 28 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 23.98p 24 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 29.97p 20 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[Rec Quality]
Resolution
(Aspect ratio)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
3840k2160
(16:9)
50.00p 100 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 25.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 25.00p 72 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
1920k1080
(16:9)
50.00p 28 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 25.00p 20 4:2:0/8 bit AVC
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
340
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
• Audio format: LPCM (2ch)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) YUV/bit
(D) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
(E) Image compression
[Rec Quality]
Resolution
(Aspect ratio)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
[6K-A/30p/420/10-L]
4992k3744
(4:3)
29.97p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[6K-A/24p/420/10-L] 23.98p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K-A/60p/420/8-L]
3328k2496
(4:3)
59.94p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/30p/422/10-I] 29.97p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K-A/30p/422/10-L] 29.97p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/30p/420/8-L] 29.97p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/24p/422/10-I] 23.98p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L] 23.98p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L] 23.98p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
4096k2160
(17:9)
59.94p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[C4K/60p/420/8-L] 59.94p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/30p/422/10-I] 29.97p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[C4K/30p/422/10-L] 29.97p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/30p/420/8-L] 29.97p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/24p/422/10-I] 23.98p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 23.98p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/24p/420/8-L] 23.98p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
341
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
3840k2160
(16:9)
59.94p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K/60p/420/8-L] 59.94p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/30p/422/10-I] 29.97p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K/30p/422/10-L] 29.97p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/30p/420/8-L] 29.97p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/24p/422/10-I] 23.98p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K/24p/422/10-L] 23.98p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/24p/420/8-L] 23.98p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]
1920k1080
(16:9)
59.94p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/60p/422/10-L] 59.94p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/60p/420/8-L] 59.94p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/30p/422/10-I] 29.97p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/30p/422/10-L] 29.97p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/30p/420/8-L] 29.97p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/24p/422/10-I] 23.98p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 23.98p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/24p/420/8-L] 23.98p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
342
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) YUV/bit
(D) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
(E) Image compression
[Rec Quality]
Resolution
(Aspect ratio)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
[6K-A/25p/420/10-L]
4992k3744
(4:3)
25.00p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K-A/50p/420/10-L]
3328k2496
(4:3)
50.00p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K-A/50p/420/8-L] 50.00p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/25p/422/10-I] 25.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K-A/25p/422/10-L] 25.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/25p/420/8-L] 25.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
4096k2160
(17:9)
50.00p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[C4K/50p/420/8-L] 50.00p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/25p/422/10-I] 25.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[C4K/25p/422/10-L] 25.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/25p/420/8-L] 25.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
3840k2160
(16:9)
50.00p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K/50p/420/8-L] 50.00p 150 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/25p/422/10-I] 25.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K/25p/422/10-L] 25.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/25p/420/8-L] 25.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
343
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) YUV/bit
(D) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
(E) Image compression
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]
1920k1080
(16:9)
50.00p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/50p/422/10-L] 50.00p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/50p/420/8-L] 50.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/25p/422/10-I] 25.00p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/25p/422/10-L] 25.00p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/25p/420/8-L] 25.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[Rec Quality]
Resolution
(Aspect ratio)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
[6K-A/24p/420/10-L]
4992k3744
(4:3)
24.00p 200 4:2:0/10 bit HEVC Long GOP
[4K-A/24p/422/10-I]
3328k2496
(4:3)
24.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L] 24.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L] 24.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
4096k2160
(17:9)
24.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 24.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[C4K/24p/420/8-L] 24.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
3840k2160
(16:9)
24.00p 400 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[4K/24p/422/10-L] 24.00p 150 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[4K/24p/420/8-L] 24.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
1920k1080
(16:9)
24.00p 200 4:2:2/10 bit AVC ALL-Intra
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 24.00p 100 4:2:2/10 bit AVC Long GOP
[FHD/24p/420/8-L] 24.00p 100 4:2:0/8 bit AVC Long GOP
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
344
• In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:
– 6K-A (4992k3744) video, 4K-A (3328k2496) video: 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3)
video
– C4K (4096k2160) video: C4K video
– 4K (3840k2160) video: 4K video
– Full High Definition (1920k1080) video: FHD video
• Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording
time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
• Videos in ALL-Intra and 4:2:2 10-bit formats are intended for editing on a PC
used for video production.
• When the following functions are being used, [Image Area of Video] is fixed to
[FULL].
– 6K Anamorphic (4:3) video
• When using the following function, you can only select 8-bit FHD video:
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
• You can register a combination of [System Frequency], [Rec. File Format],
[Image Area of Video], and [Rec Quality] to My List. (
[add to list]: 346)
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
345
[Filtering]
When the [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], you can specify items such as
frame rate, resolution, and codec (YUV, Bit value, Image compression),
and just display recording quality that meets those conditions.
1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.].
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
• Settings: [Frame Rate]/[Resolution]/[Codec]/[Variable Frame Rate]/[Hybrid Log
Gamma]
3 Press 34 to select the filtering conditions and then press or .
4 Press [DISP.] to confirm the setting.
• You are returned to the [Rec Quality] setting screen.
Clearing the filtering conditions
Select [ANY] in Step 3.
• The filtering conditions are also cleared when you do the following:
– Change the [System Frequency]
– Select a recording quality from [Rec Quality (My List)]
• When you change recording quality using a filter, the current filtering conditions
are stored.
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
346
[add to list]
Select a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality
you register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)].
1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q].
• The following settings are also registered at the same time:
– [System Frequency]
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Image Area of Video]
Setting or deleting in My List
1 Select [Rec Quality (My List)].
•
[ ] [ ] [Rec Quality (My List)]
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
• You cannot select setting items that have different system frequencies.
• To delete from My List, select the item and press [Q].
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
347
Display [Rec Quality (My List)] on the Control Panel
You can display the My List of recording quality from the control panel in [ ] mode
or when it is set to [Video-Priority Display].
1 Display the setting screen.
• Touch the recording quality item.
• When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is
displayed.
When not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed.
• [Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.]
button.
– The next time the setting screen is displayed, the screen last used is
displayed.
• Up to 12 types of recording quality can be registered.
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
348
[Image Area of Video]
Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs
depending on the image area.
Narrowing the image area allows you to achieve a telescopic effect without
image deterioration.
[ ] [ ] Select [Image Area of Video]
Item Settings details
[FULL]
Records according to the range that corresponds to the image
circle of the lens that is for Micro four thirds.
Angle of view: Wide
Telescopic effect: Not possible
[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Records with one pixel on the sensor, which is equal to one pixel
of the video.
Records a range corresponding to the resolution range in [Rec
Quality]. (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
Angle of view: Narrow
Telescopic effect: Possible
10. Recording Videos – Video Recording Settings
349
Image area (Ex.: FHD video)
•
When the following functions are being used, [Image Area of Video] is fixed to
[FULL].
– [Live Cropping]
– 6K Anamorphic (4:3) video
FULL
PIXEL/PIXEL
10. Recording Videos – Time Code
350
Time Code
≥Setting the Time Code: 350
When video is recorded in the MOV format, the hour, minute, seconds, and
number of frames information (time code) is recorded automatically.
The time code is used to synchronize multiple image and audio sources.
•
The time code is not recorded with video in the MP4 format.
Setting the Time Code
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
10. Recording Videos – Time Code
351
2
Select [Time Code].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
[Count Up]
[REC RUN]: Counts the time code only when recording videos.
[FREE RUN]: Counts the time code also when video recording is stopped and
when the camera is turned off.
• When the following function is being used, [Count Up] is fixed to [REC RUN]:
– [Variable Frame Rate]
[Time Code Value]
[Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)
[Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.
[Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to
00.
10. Recording Videos – Time Code
352
[Time Code Mode]
[DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time
and time code.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)
• When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode] is fixed to
[NDF]:
– [50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] ([System Frequency])
– 23.98p [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time Code Output]
Time code information is added to images output via HDMI when recording with
the [ ] mode.
• The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode dial to [ ]
during playback.
In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, set [Output Resolution(Playback)] in [HDMI
Connection] to [AUTO]. (
[HDMI Connection]: 590)
• The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.
10. Recording Videos – Using AF (Video)
353
Using AF (Video)
≥[Continuous AF]: 354
≥[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355
This section describes the use of AF when video recording.
•
In “
5. Focus/Zoom”, the functions described work with both pictures and video.
–
Selecting the Focus Mode: 125
– Selecting the AF Mode: 135
– AF Area Movement Operation: 158
– Record Using MF: 167
– Recording with Zoom: 174
10. Recording Videos – Using AF (Video)
354
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
[ ] [ ] Select [Continuous AF]
[MODE1]
The camera continues to automatically focus only during
recording.
[MODE2]
When recording with [ ] mode, the camera automatically
keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and during
recording.
[OFF] The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
• In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording
standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous
AF] set to [OFF].
• If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to
come into focus.
• When the following function is being used, [MODE1] switches to [MODE2]:
– HDMI output ([ ] mode)
• [MODE2] does not work during recording standby in the following cases:
– In low light situations
10. Recording Videos – Using AF (Video)
355
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
[ ] [ ] Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[r] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[s] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[r] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly, the
camera immediately readjusts the focus.
[s] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly, the
camera waits for a little before readjusting the focus.
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
356
Video Brightness and Coloring
≥[Luminance Level]: 357
≥[Master Pedestal Level]: 358
≥Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 360
≥[ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 362
This section describes the brightness and coloring settings used during
video recording.
•
In “
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity” and “8. White Balance/Image Quality”,
the functions described work with both pictures and video.
Please also refer to those sections.
–
[Metering Mode]: 252
– Exposure Compensation: 269
– Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271
– ISO Sensitivity: 273
– White Balance (WB): 278
– [Photo Style]: 285
– [Filter Settings]: 293
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
357
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255],
which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
[ ] [ ] Select [Luminance Level]
Settings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
•
When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023], [64-940],
and [64-1023].
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this is fixed to [0-255] ([0-1023]).
• When [Photo Style] is set to [Hybrid Log Gamma], this is fixed to [64-940].
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
358
[Master Pedestal Level]
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Select [Master Pedestal Level].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Master Pedestal Level]
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
359
3
Adjust master pedestal.
≥Rotate , or .
•
Set in the range between j15 and i15.
• [Master Pedestal Level] is not available when using the following function:
– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style])
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
360
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that
recording can be performed with minimal overexposure.
1
Set [Photo Style] to [Like709].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Photo Style] [Like709]
2
Press [Q].
±0
±0
/LNH
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
361
3
Select a knee setting.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
[AUTO]
Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically.
[MANUAL]
You can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and
the intensity of compression (knee master slope).
Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
[POINT]: Master knee point
[SLOPE]: Master knee slope
• Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and to adjust the knee
master slope.
• Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Master knee point: 80.0 to 107.0
– Master knee slope: 0 to 99
[Off]
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
362
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
≥ [ ] [ ] [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
10. Recording Videos – Video Brightness and Coloring
363
Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set in the range between [200] and [6400].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [400] and
[12800].
• When [Filter Settings] is set to [High Dynamic], [ISO Sensitivity (video)] cannot
be used.
10. Recording Videos – Audio Settings
364
Audio Settings
≥[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364
≥[Mute Sound Input]: 365
≥[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 365
≥[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 366
≥[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366
≥[Wind Noise Canceller]: 367
≥[Lens Noise Cut]: 368
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
[ ] [ ] Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed
to [ON].
10. Recording Videos – Audio Settings
365
[Mute Sound Input]
This mutes audio input.
[ ] [ ] Select [Mute Sound Input]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
This switches the gain of audio input.
[ ] [ ] Select [Sound Rec Gain Level]
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• The audio input from the external microphone will also be muted.
[STANDARD] This is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB)
[LOW]
Audio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud
noises. (j12 dB)
10. Recording Videos – Audio Settings
366
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
1
Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.].
•
[ ] [ ] [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
2
Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then
press or .
• You can adjust the sound recording level within the range from
[MUTE], [j18dB] to [i12dB] in steps of 1 dB.
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound distortion
(crackling noise).
[ ] [ ] Select [Sound Rec Level Limiter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
10. Recording Videos – Audio Settings
367
[Wind Noise Canceller]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
[ ] [ ] Select [Wind Noise Canceller]
[HIGH]
This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the
low-pitched sound when a strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]
This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering
out only wind noise.
[OFF] —
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
(
Reduction of Wind Noise: 438)
10. Recording Videos – Audio Settings
368
[Lens Noise Cut]
You can reduce the zoom sound produced during video recording when you are using
interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.
[ ] [ ] Select [Lens Noise Cut]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal
operation.
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
369
Main Assist Functions
≥[SS/Gain Operation]: 370
≥[WFM/Vector Scope]: 371
≥[Luminance Spot Meter]: 375
≥[Zebra Pattern]: 377
≥[Frame Marker]: 379
≥Color bars/Test Tone: 380
This section describes the main assist functions that are convenient when
recording.
•
The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions
such as the center marker. (
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 575)
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
370
[SS/Gain Operation]
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity)
values.
[ ] [ ] Select [SS/Gain Operation]
[SEC/ISO] Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.
[ANGLE/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.
• The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 358°.
(When [Synchro Scan] is set to [OFF])
[SEC/dB]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.
• 0 dB is equivalent to ISO 200. (When [Photo Style] is set to
[V-Log L] or [Hybrid Log Gamma], it is equivalent to ISO 400.)
• When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown
below:
– [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[Gain Setting]
– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
[Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]
– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
[Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]
– [Extended ISO]
[Extended Gain Setting]
– [ISO Displayed Setting]
[Gain Displayed Setting]
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
371
[WFM/Vector Scope]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording
screen. You can change the size of the waveform display.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [WFM/Vector Scope].
≥ [ ] [ ] [WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE]
Displays a waveform.
[VECTOR]
Displays the vector scope.
[OFF]
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
372
3
Select the position to display.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .
•
You can also move using touch operations.
• You can rotate to change the size of the waveform.
• To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press
[DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the
default setting.
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
373
Screen Displays
Waveform
•
The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on
the conversions below:
0 % (IRE
*1
): Luminance value 16 (8-bit)
100 % (IRE
*1
): Luminance value 235 (8-bit)
*1 IRE: Institute of Radio Engineers
(A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(B) 100 % (IRE)
(C) 50 % (IRE)
(D) 0 % (IRE)
(E) j4 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.
Display example
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
374
Vector scope
(G) R (Red)
(H) YL (Yellow)
(I) G (Green)
(J) MG (Magenta)
(K) B (Blue)
(L) CY (Cyan)
Display example
• You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.
• The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.
• When [WFM/Vector Scope] is set, [Histogram] does not work.
(J)
(K)
(L)
(G)
(H)
(I)
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
375
[Luminance Spot Meter]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small
area.
1
Set [Luminance Spot Meter].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Luminance Spot Meter] [ON]
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
376
2
Select the position where you want to measure the
luminance.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .
•
You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording
screen.
• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
(A) Luminance value
Measurement Range
Measuring is possible in the range j7 % to 109 % (IRE).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this can be measured with “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
(A)
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
377
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed with
stripes.
You can also set the benchmark value and the breadth of the range so that
the stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness
you specify.
[ZEBRA1]
[ZEBRA2]
[ZEBRA1+2]
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
378
[ ] [ ] Select [Zebra Pattern]
When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]
Centered on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness
in the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.
• [Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).
• [Range] can be set in the range between n1 % and n10 % (IRE).
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], these are set at “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
[ZEBRA1]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed
with [ZEBRA1] stripes.
[ZEBRA2]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed
with [ZEBRA2] stripes.
[ZEBRA1+2] Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the benchmark brightness.
[Zebra 1]/[Zebra 2]
[50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
• [ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
379
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This
allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved
with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
[ ] [ ] Select [Frame Marker]
[ON] Displays video grid lines on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the aspect ratio of video grid lines.
[Frame Aspect]:
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/[4:3]/[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/
[9:16]
[Frame Color]:
Sets the color of video grid lines.
Sets the outer side opacity of video grid lines.
[Frame Mask]:
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
380
Color bars/Test Tone
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
A test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed.
[SMPTE]
[EBU]
[ARIB]
[ ] [ ] Select [Color Bars]
Settings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]
•
To end the display, press .
10. Recording Videos – Main Assist Functions
381
Adjusting the Test Tone
There are 4 levels ([j12dB], [j18dB], [j20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone
to select.
1 Rotate , or to select the test tone level.
• The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is
started while the color bars are being displayed.
• The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder
may differ from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
10. Recording Videos – [Variable Frame Rate]
382
[Variable Frame Rate]
By recording using a frame rate that is different to the playback frame rate,
you can record smooth slow motion video and fast motion video.
Slow Motion Video
(Overcrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is higher than the
recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 48 fps and set to a
24.00p [Rec Quality], the speed is halved.
Fast Motion Video
(Undercrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is lower than the
recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 12 fps and set to a
24.00p [Rec Quality], the speed is doubled.
10. Recording Videos – [Variable Frame Rate]
383
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
3
Select a recording quality with which you can use
[Variable Frame Rate] recording.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec Quality]
•
Items with which you can use [Variable Frame Rate] are indicated as [VFR
available].
• Recording qualities with which you can use [Variable Frame Rate] recording
(
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
416
)
10. Recording Videos – [Variable Frame Rate]
384
4
Set [Variable Frame Rate].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Variable Frame Rate] [ON]
≥Press 21 to switch between [ON] and [OFF].
5
Set the frame rate.
≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
Available Frame Rate Setting Ranges
The frame rate you can set differs depending on the [Rec Quality] settings.
*1 When set to a 23.98p or 24.00p [Rec Quality], a frame rate exceeding 48 fps
cannot be set.
*2 When the frame rate is set to 150 fps or higher, [Image Area of Video] will be set to
[FULL].
[Rec Quality] Frame rate
4K Anamorphic (4:3) video 2 fps to 50 fps
*1
C4K video/4K video 2 fps to 60 fps
FHD video 2fps to 180fps
*2
10. Recording Videos – [Variable Frame Rate]
385
• You can filter to show just the recording qualities where [Variable Frame Rate]
can be used. (
[Filtering]: 345)
• We recommend using a tripod when recording images with [Variable Frame
Rate].
• Focus mode switches to MF.
(When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you cannot set focus
with MF.)
• If you press the [AF ON] only before recording starts, the focus will be adjusted
automatically.
– You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [AF-ON]. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
• Audio will not be recorded during variable frame rate recording.
• When set to a frame rate exceeding 60 fps, there may be some deterioration in
recording quality.
• When the following functions are being used, [Variable Frame Rate] is not
available:
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live Cropping]
10. Recording Videos – [Focus Transition]
386
[Focus Transition]
Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a
position registered in advance.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Select [Focus Transition].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Focus Transition]
10. Recording Videos – [Focus Transition]
387
3
Set the recording settings.
[Start]
Start recording.
[Focus Pull Setting]
Registers the focus position.
• The setting screen for the focus position is displayed when you select either
[1], [2], or [3]. Use the same procedure as MF (
Record Using MF: 167) to
check the focus, then press or to register the focus position.
[Focus Transition Speed]
Sets the moving speed of focus.
• Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)
[Focus Transition Rec]
Starts Focus Transition when recording starts.
• Select the position registered with [Focus Pull Setting].
[Focus Transition Wait]
Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
4
Close the menu.
≥Selects [Start], and press or .
≥The recording screen is displayed.
•
To return to the setting screen, press [DISP.].
10. Recording Videos – [Focus Transition]
388
5
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus Transition will start when
you start recording a video.
6
Start Focus Transition.
≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press or .
•
When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time
has elapsed.
(A) Current focus position
(B) Registered focus position
(A) (B)
10. Recording Videos – [Focus Transition]
389
7
End Focus Transition.
≥Press [Q].
8
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button once again.
• Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting the focus position.
• The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.
• While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than
the registered focus position.
• Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Zoom operation
– Switching the focus mode
– Switching the recording mode
– Replacing the lens
• When the following functions are being used, [Focus Transition] is not available:
– [Variable Frame Rate]
– [Live Cropping]
• [Focus Transition] cannot be used when using an interchangeable lens that does
not support the focus mode [AFC].
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
390
[Live Cropping]
By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view, it
is possible to record FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming
with the camera staying in a fixed position.
Pan
Zoom in
•
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
391
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MP4]/[MOV]
3
Select a recording quality with which you can record
[Live Cropping] video.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec Quality]
•
A recording quality with which you can record [Live Cropping] video (
List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 416
)
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
392
4
Set the time for panning or zooming.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Live Cropping] [40SEC]/[20SEC]
•
If you have selected a recording quality where Live Cropping recording is not
available, the camera switches to an FHD video recording quality where
recording is possible.
5
Set the cropping start frame.
≥Select the range to be cropped and press or .
(A) Cropping start frame
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
6WDUW
(A)
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
393
6
Set the cropping end frame.
≥Select the range to be cropped and press or .
•
To redo the settings for the position and size of the start frame and the end
frame, press 2.
(B) Cropping end frame
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
(QG
(B)
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
394
7
Start Live Cropping recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
When the set operating time has elapsed, recording automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the video rec. button again.
(C) Elapsed recording time
(D) Set operating time
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
(C) (D)
10. Recording Videos – [Live Cropping]
395
Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves the frame.
/
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the frame in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the frame.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Start frame: Returns the frame position and size
to the default settings.
End frame: Cancels the settings for the position
and size of the frame.
[Set] Confirms the frame position and size.
• AF mode switches to [ ] ([Human Detect AF]). (Human bodies cannot be
detected. It is not possible to specify the person to bring into focus.)
• Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping frame.
To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus mode to
[MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (multi-metering).
10. Recording Videos – Log Recording
396
Log Recording
≥[V-Log L] Settings: 396
≥[V-LogL View Assist]: 398
[V-Log L] Settings
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log L] enables Log recording.
Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post production
processing.
[ ] [ ] [Photo Style] Select [V-Log L]
ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log L] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
•
Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT data from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
10. Recording Videos – Log Recording
397
Exposure When [V-Log L] Is Set
The [V-Log L] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log L], the standard
exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.
(A) Reflectance ratio: 18 %
(B) Reflectance ratio: 90 %
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
•
When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 %
to “0 Stop”.
Reflectance ratio (%) 01890
IRE (%) 7.3 42 61
Stop — 0.0 2.3
10 bit code value 128 433 602
12 bit code value 512 1732 2408
-
8
-
8
-
7
-
7
-
6
-
6
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
10011223344556677 88
（Stop）（Stop）
00
6464
128128
192192
256256
320320
448448
512512
576576
640640
704704
384384
（10bitcodevalue）（10bitcodevalue）
768768
832832
896896
960960
10241024
(A)
(B)
10. Recording Videos – Log Recording
398
[V-LogL View Assist]
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. Using [V-LogL View Assist] means you can
show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output
them via HDMI.
[ ] [ ] Select [V-LogL View Assist]
• Luminance can be checked by “Stop” units:
[]
[ ] [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 375)
[]
[ ] [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 377)
[Read LUT File] Reads LUT data from the card.
[LUT Select]
Selects the LUT data to be applied from among the
preset ([Vlog_709]) and registered LUT data.
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
Displays the images with LUT data applied on the
monitor/viewfinder of the camera.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] Applies LUT data to images output over HDMI.
• When applying the LUT data, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.
• Up to 4 LUT data files can be registered.
10. Recording Videos – Log Recording
399
Reading LUT Files
1 Insert a card on which LUT data is saved into the camera.
2 Select [Read LUT File].
•
[ ] [ ] [V-LogL View Assist] [Read LUT File] [Card Slot
1]/[Card Slot 2]
3 Press 34 to select the LUT data to read and then press or .
4 Press 34 to select the location to register the data, and then press or
.
• When registered items are selected, they will be overwritten.
• The following LUT data can be used:
– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM
3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on
the file system of the card.
(Use alphanumeric characters for the file name.)
FAT32 (SD/SDHC card): Up to 8 characters (excluding extension).
exFAT (SDXC card): Up to 255 characters (including the extension).
• Save the LUT data with a file extension of “.vlt” in the root directory of the card
(the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).
10. Recording Videos – HLG Videos
400
HLG Videos
≥[Hybrid Log Gamma] settings: 401
≥[HLG View Assist]: 404
Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can
record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas
where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you
can see with your naked eye.
You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices
(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on
supporting devices.
•
“HLG” is a standardized HDR video format that converts and expands the dynamic
range of compressed high-luminance image data on a supported device.
10. Recording Videos – HLG Videos
401
[Hybrid Log Gamma] settings
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MP4]/[MOV]
10. Recording Videos – HLG Videos
402
3
Select a recording quality with which you can record
HLG video.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available].
• Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (
List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 416
)
4
Set [Photo Style] to [Hybrid Log Gamma].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Photo Style] [Hybrid Log Gamma]
≥You can also display the setting screen of [Photo Style] by pressing
[ ] in the recording screen.
±0
±0
+\EULG/RJ*DPPD
10. Recording Videos – HLG Videos
403
ISO Sensitivity When [Hybrid Log Gamma] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
•
When the [Rec. File Format] has been set to [MOV], you can display just the
recording qualities where HLG video recording can be used. (
[Filtering]: 345)
• The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG format
images.
With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor/
viewfinder of this camera. (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for monitoring.
(
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
10. Recording Videos – HLG Videos
404
[HLG View Assist]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted
color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs
these over HDMI.
[ ] [ ] [HLG View Assist] [Monitor] or
[HDMI]
*1 Can only be set while [HDMI] is selected.
[AUTO]
*1
Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while
applying the effect of [MODE2]. This conversion setting works
only when the camera is connected to a device that does not
support HDR (HLG format).
[MODE1]
Converts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.
• [MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.
[MODE2]
Converts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.
• [MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF]
Displays without converting color gamut and brightness.
• HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the
HLG format.
10. Recording Videos – Anamorphic Recording
405
Anamorphic Recording
≥6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video: 406
≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407
This camera can record video with a resolution of 6K-A/4K-A (6K/4K
anamorphic (4:3) video) that is compatible with anamorphic recording with
an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Along with the normal 16:9 video aspect ratio, you can select the recording
quality suited to anamorphic recording.
– It is also possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
(
Image Stabilizer Settings: 246)
• When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], by filtering [Rec Quality] by the number
of pixels, you can display just those recording qualities with resolutions and
aspect ratios that meet the conditions. (
[Filtering]: 345)
10. Recording Videos – Anamorphic Recording
406
6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Select a recording quality wherein you can record 6K/4K
Anamorphic (4:3) video.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video are indicated as
[ANAMOR].
• Recording qualities wherein you can record 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video
(
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
416
)
10. Recording Videos – Anamorphic Recording
407
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
Display the de-squeezed images suited to the magnification of the
anamorphic lens on this camera.
Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to impose on display the
frame of the angle of view when cropping after de-squeeze editing.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
10. Recording Videos – Anamorphic Recording
408
2
Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[ ] ([2.0k])
[] ([1.8k])
[ ] ([1.5k])
[ ] ([1.33k])
[ ] ([1.30k])
[OFF]
• Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
10. Recording Videos – [Synchro Scan]
410
[Synchro Scan]
Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.
The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the
shutter speed used for normal recording.
In the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter
speed for normal recording and adjust it.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the exposure mode to [S] or [M].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Exposure Mode] [S]/[M]
10. Recording Videos – [Synchro Scan]
411
3
Set [Synchro Scan].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Synchro Scan] [ON]
4
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
• You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing
[DISP.].
• Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and
horizontal stripes will be minimized.
• When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range
becomes narrower.
&XUUHQWVKXWWHUVSHHG
ュリヴヱハ
6161
10. Recording Videos – [Loop Recording (video)]
412
[Loop Recording (video)]
Even when recording uses up the card’s free space, the camera continues
the recording by deleting the oldest segment of the recorded data.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
10. Recording Videos – [Loop Recording (video)]
413
3
Set [Loop Recording (video)].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Loop Recording (video)] [ON]
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• When the recording fills the card to capacity, loop recording starts and video
recording time is no longer displayed.
• Make sure the camera does not turn off during recording.
• Loop recording cannot start if there is insufficient available capacity on the card.
• When the recording time exceeds 12 hours, recording continues with data being
deleted in order from the point where recording started.
• When the following functions are being used, [Loop Recording (video)] is not
available:
– [Rec Quality] with a bit rate of 400 Mbps
– [Variable Frame Rate]
– [Live Cropping]
10. Recording Videos – [Segmented File Recording]
414
[Segmented File Recording]
To avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply,
recorded video is divided every few minutes while MOV video is being
recorded.
•
The divided videos are saved as one group image.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Set [Segmented File Recording].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Segmented File Recording] [10MIN.]/
[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]
10. Recording Videos – [Segmented File Recording]
415
• When the following function is being used, [Segmented File Recording] is not
available:
– [Loop Recording (video)]
10. Recording Videos – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
416
List of Recording Qualities That Enable
Special Videos to be Recorded
: Recording qualities that enable use of [Variable Frame Rate]
: Recording qualities that enable use of [Live Cropping]
: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
: Recording qualities for anamorphic recording with an aspect ratio of
4:3
VFR
Live Crop
HLG
10. Recording Videos – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
417
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
Live Crop
HLG
Live Crop
HLG
10. Recording Videos – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
418
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[6K-A/30p/420/10-L]
[6K-A/24p/420/10-L]
[4K-A/60p/420/8-L]
[4K-A/30p/422/10-I]
[4K-A/30p/422/10-L]
[4K-A/30p/420/8-L]
[4K-A/24p/422/10-I]
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/8-L]
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/8-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/8-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/8-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-I]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/8-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/8-L]
VFR
Live Crop
HLG
10. Recording Videos – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
419
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/8-L]
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/8-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
[Rec Quality]
[6K-A/25p/420/10-L]
[4K-A/50p/420/10-L]
[4K-A/50p/420/8-L]
[4K-A/25p/422/10-I]
[4K-A/25p/422/10-L]
[4K-A/25p/420/8-L]
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/420/8-L]
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/8-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/8-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-I]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/8-L]
VFR
Live Crop
HLG
10. Recording Videos – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
420
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/8-L]
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/8-L]
[Rec Quality]
[6K-A/24p/420/10-L]
[4K-A/24p/422/10-I]
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/8-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/8-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
VFR
Live Crop
HLG
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
422
HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
≥Attaching the Cable Holder: 424
≥Images Output via HDMI: 427
You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor
or external recorder connected with an HDMI cable.
•
HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
For HDMI output settings during playback (
[HDMI Connection]: 590)
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
423
1
Connect the camera and an external monitor or external
recorder with a commercially available HDMI cable.
(A) [HDMI] socket (Type A)
(B) External monitor
(C) External recorder
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
(A)
(B)
(C)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
424
Attaching the Cable Holder
Use of the supplied cable holder prevents detachment of the cable and
damage to the terminals.
• Put the camera on a stable surface to perform this task.
Example: Attaching to an HDMI cable
1
While pushing (A) (1), slide the clamp portion of the
cable holder to remove it (2).
2
After placing the camera on a stable surface, loosely
mount the cable holder to the mount on the camera (3),
and secure the cable holder by rotating the screws in
the direction of the arrows (4), (5).
(A)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
425
3
Attach the HDMI cable to the clamp portion (6).
4
Slide the clamp portion to attach it to the cable holder
(7).
5
Connect the HDMI cable to the [HDMI] socket (8).
• You can also connect the HDMI cable and USB connection cable at
the same time when the cable holder is attached.
(B) Leave some slack so that this section has a length of at least 10 cm
(0.33 feet).
(B)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
426
Removing the cable holder
To remove the cable holder, follow the steps for attaching it in the reverse
order.
•
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied USB
connection cables.
• We recommend using an HDMI cable with a thickness diameter of 6 mm
(0.24 inch) or less.
• It may not be possible to attach HDMI cables of certain shapes.
• Keep the clamp portion of the cable holder out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
427
Images Output via HDMI
The images output via HDMI differ depending on the recording mode.
[ ] Mode
Aspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec
Quality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu. Resolution and
frame rate can be down-converted for output according to the application.
YUV 4:2:2 is used for YUV and bit value output.
Resolution, frame rate
• Resolution and frame rate output according to the following menu combinations:
– [Rec Quality] in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.
– [Down Convert] in [HDMI Rec Output] of the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
• 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video is output with a 4K or FHD resolution.
• For details (
Image Quality When Outputting via HDMI: 430)
Recording to card HDMI output
4:2:2 10-bit 4:2:2 10-bit
4:2:0 10-bit 4:2:2 10-bit
4:2:0 8-bit 4:2:2 8-bit
• When set to a 4:3 [Rec Quality], bands are added to the left and right of the
image for output.
• Output may be in 8-bit if you output to devices that do not support 10-bit.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
428
[iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode
• Output is the same as [ ] mode during video recording.
• During recording standby, it is output according to the setting of [Aspect Ratio] in the
[Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.
– When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the left and
right of the image for output.
– Resolution, frame rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.
Notice Regarding HDMI Output
• It may take some time for the output method to change.
• When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a
time lag.
• Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI
output.
• When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the
microphone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV,
producing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).
If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.
• Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
• There is no output via HDMI while you are recording with the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
• If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may stop,
and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the camera
cools down.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/Frame
Rate)
429
HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/
Frame Rate)
≥Settings for Down-Converting: 429
Settings for Down-Converting
Make settings for the down-conversion of resolution and frame rate for
HDMI output in the [ ] mode.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Down
Convert]
[AUTO]
Outputs by down-converting to match the connected
device.
[4K/30p] ([4K/25p])
Outputs by down-converting resolution to 4K and
frame rate to either 29.97p or 25.00p.
[1080p]
Down-converts resolution to FHD (1080), and outputs
as progressive.
[1080i]
Down-converts resolution to FHD (1080), and outputs
as interlaced.
[OFF]
Outputs at the resolution and recording frame rate of
the [Rec Quality].
• The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.
• 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video is output with a 4K or FHD resolution.
• If down-converting, AF may take longer than usual for focusing, and the
performance of continuous focus tracking may deteriorate.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/Frame
Rate)
430
Image Quality When Outputting via HDMI
Output is with the resolution and frame rate according to the combinations
of the [Rec Quality] and [Down Convert] settings.
• When [Down Convert] is set to [AUTO], the output matches the connected device.
• There is no HDMI output when setting combinations result in a [—] in the below
tables.
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
*1 Output is 1080/59.94p if the connected device is not compatible.
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
4K-A/59.94p
4K/59.94p
6K-A/29.97p
4K-A/29.97p
4K/29.97p
6K-A/23.98p
4K-A/23.98p
4K/23.98p
[4K/30p] 4K/29.97p 4K/29.97p —
[1080p] 1080/59.94p 1080/29.97p
*1
1080/23.98p
[1080i] 1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i —
[OFF] 4K/59.94p 4K/29.97p 4K/23.98p
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
C4K/59.94p C4K/29.97p C4K/23.98p
[4K/30p] 4K/29.97p 4K/29.97p —
[1080p] 1080/59.94p 1080/29.97p
*1
1080/23.98p
[1080i] 1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i —
[OFF] C4K/59.94p C4K/29.97p C4K/23.98p
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/59.94p 1080/29.97p 1080/23.98p
[4K/30p] ———
[1080p] 1080/59.94p 1080/29.97p
*1
1080/23.98p
[1080i] 1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i —
[OFF] 1080/59.94p 1080/29.97p 1080/23.98p
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/Frame
Rate)
431
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
*2 Output is 1080/50.00p if the connected device is not compatible.
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
4K-A/50.00p
4K/50.00p
6K-A/25.00p
4K-A/25.00p
4K/25.00p
C4K/50.00p C4K/25.00p
[4K/25p] 4K/25.00p 4K/25.00p 4K/25.00p 4K/25.00p
[1080p] 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
*2
1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
*2
[1080i] 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i
[OFF] 4K/50.00p 4K/25.00p C4K/50.00p C4K/25.00p
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
[4K/25p] ——
[1080p] 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
*2
[1080i] 1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i
[OFF] 1080/50.00p 1080/25.00p
[Down
Convert]
Resolution and recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality]
6K-A/24.00p
4K-A/24.00p
4K/24.00p
C4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p
[1080p] 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p 1080/24.00p
[OFF] 4K/24.00p C4K/24.00p 1080/24.00p
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
432
HDMI Output Settings
≥Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI: 432
≥Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder: 433
≥Outputting Down-converted Audio to an HDMI Device: 434
≥Outputting Audio via HDMI: 434
≥Output the enlarged display of MF assist via HDMI: 435
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI
Output the camera information display to an external device connected by
HDMI.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Info
Display]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
433
Outputting Control Information to an External
Recorder
Recording start and stop control information is output to an external
recorder connected by HDMI.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [HDMI
Recording Control]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON]
in [ ] mode.
• Control information is output when pressing the video rec. button or shutter button,
even if the video cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into the
camera).
• Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
434
Outputting Down-converted Audio to an HDMI
Device
When an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is attached,
audio is down-converted to a format suitable for the connected HDMI
external device before being output.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Sound
Down Convert]
Outputting Audio via HDMI
Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Sound
Output (HDMI)]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[AUTO]
Output is down-converted to match the connected
device.
[OFF]
Output is according to the settings in [XLR Mic
Adaptor Setting].
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
435
Output the enlarged display of MF assist via HDMI
The MF Assist enlarged display is output to the external device connected
via HDMI.
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [HDMI MF
Assist Output]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [HDMI MF Assist Output] is set to [OFF] and the MF Assist enlarged
display is being shown, the camera information display is not output via HDMI.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – External Microphones (Optional)
436
External Microphones (Optional)
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo
Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher quality audio
compared to the built-in microphone.
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Connect the camera and external microphone.
• If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe, remove the hot
shoe cover. (
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 305)
(A) Hot shoe
(B) [MIC] socket
• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
(A)
(B)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – External Microphones (Optional)
437
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional)
When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you
can set the microphone sound pickup range.
1 Select [Special Mic.].
•
[ ] [ ] [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Picks up sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO]
Picks up sound from a range automatically set by the lens angle of view.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific
direction.
[S.SHOTGUN]
Narrows the sound pickup range more than with [SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL]
Sets the range manually for sound pickup.
2 (When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press 21 to adjust the sound pickup range and then press or .
• You can register the [MANUAL] sound pickup range setting in a Fn button:
[]
[ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Special Mic.
Directivity Adjust] (
Fn Buttons: 471)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – External Microphones (Optional)
438
Reduction of Wind Noise
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
[ ] [ ] Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
•
While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding
the external microphone. It may become detached.
• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
439
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
By attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) to the
camera, you can use a commercially available XLR microphone to enable
the recording of superior-quality high-res/stereo audio.
(A) Hot shoe
(B) Commercially available XLR microphone
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover. (
Removing the Hot Shoe
Cover: 305
)
1
Attach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe.
2
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON].
(A)
(B)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
440
3
Select [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting].
≥ [ ] [ ] [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
[96kHz/24bit]
Records high resolution audio at 96 kHz/24-bit.
• Only available when [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV].
[48kHz/24bit]
Records high-quality audio at 48 kHz/24-bit.
• Only available when [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV].
[48kHz/16bit]
Records standard-quality audio at 48 kHz/16-bit.
[OFF]
Records audio using the built-in microphone of the camera.
• While an XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to other than [OFF], the following settings
are fixed:
– [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: [OFF]
– [Wind Noise Canceller]: [OFF]
– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]
• [Sound Rec Gain Level] and [Sound Rec Level Adj.] cannot be used when [XLR
Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to other than [OFF].
• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, do not carry the camera by
holding the XLR Microphone Adaptor. It may become detached.
• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the XLR Microphone Adaptor.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – Headphones
441
Headphones
You can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting
commercially available headphones to the camera.
(A) Headphone socket
• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
• When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter
sounds are muted.
(A)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) – Headphones
442
Switching the Sound Output Method
[ ] [ ] Select [Sound Output]
Adjusting the Headphone Volume
Connect the headphones and rotate .
: Reduces the volume.
: Increases the volume.
•
You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ]/[ ] on the playback screen.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
1 Select [Headphone Volume].
•
[ ] [ ] [Headphone Volume]
2 Press 34 to adjust the headphone volume and then press or .
• It can be adjusted in a range of [0] to [LEVEL15].
[REALTIME]
Audio without time lag.
It may differ from the sound recorded in videos.
[REC SOUND]
Audio to be recorded in videos.
Output sound may be delayed from actual sound.
• The setting is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following cases:
– During output of audio via HDMI
– When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [SHOTGUN], [S.SHOTGUN], or
[MANUAL]
– When using an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)
443
12. Playing Back and Editing of
Images
≥Playing Back Pictures: 444
≥Playing Back Videos: 446
≥Switching the Display Mode: 450
≥Group Images: 456
≥Deleting Images: 458
≥[RAW Processing]: 460
≥[Video Divide]: 467
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
It also explains editing using [RAW Processing] (
[RAW Processing]:
460) and [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 467).
•
Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or
edited correctly on this camera.
• For [Playback] menus other than [RAW Processing] and [Video Divide]
(
[Playback] Menu: 597)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
444
Playing Back Pictures
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a picture.
≥Select the pictures by pressing 21.
≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and
holding 21.
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally. By leaving your finger touching the left or right edge of
the screen after dragging to change the image, you can
continuously move through images.
(A) Card slot
(A)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
445
3
Stop playback.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also stop playback by pressing [ ].
Switching the Card to Display
You can switch the card displayed just by pressing [ ] during playback.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Card Slot Change]. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
1 Press [ ].
2 Press 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2] and then press or .
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
446
Playing Back Videos
≥Extracting a Picture: 449
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a video.
• For information about how to select images (
Playing Back Pictures: 444)
• The [ ] video icon is displayed for a video.
• The video recording time is displayed on the screen.
(A) Video recording time
(A)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
447
3
Play back the video.
≥Press 3.
≥You can also start playback by touching [ ] at the center of the
screen.
(B) Elapsed playback time
(C) Playback bar
4
Stop playback.
≥Press 4.
(B) (C)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
448
Operations During Video Playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3
/
Plays/pauses.
4 — Stops.
2 —
Performs fast-rewind playback.
• If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while
paused).
1 —
Performs fast-forward playback.
• If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
— Selects the frame to display.
/
Extracts a picture (while paused). (Extracting a
Picture: 449
)
Reduces the volume.
Increases the volume.
• The camera can play back videos in MP4, and MOV formats.
• Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current
one cannot be played back.
6DYH
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
449
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
2
Save the picture.
≥Press or .
≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save].
•
The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec Quality].
• The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than normal.
• [ ] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
450
Switching the Display Mode
≥Enlarged Display: 450
≥Thumbnail Screen: 452
≥Calendar Playback: 454
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once
(multiplayback).
You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected
recording date.
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
1
Enlarging the playback screen.
≥Rotate to the right.
≥The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2k 4k 8k
16k.
•
Rotating to the left returns to the previous display size.
• Pictures taken with [Picture Quality] set to [RAW] cannot be displayed
enlarged at 16k.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
451
Operations During Enlarged Display
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3421 Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
/
—
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining
the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
• You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from that
point:
[]
[ ] [Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 600)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
452
Thumbnail Screen
1
Switch to thumbnail display.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen
30-image screen.
•
Rotating to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar
display. (
Calendar Playback: 454)
• Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
• You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
[ ]: 1-image screen
[ ]: 12-image screen
[ ]: 30-image screen
[ ]: Calendar (
Calendar Playback: 454)
(A) Card slot
2
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press or .
CAL
(A)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
453
• When you press [ ] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch to
the card being displayed.
• You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
• Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
454
Calendar Playback
1
Switch to calendar playback.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen
(12 images) Thumbnail screen (30 images) Calendar
playback.
•
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
2
Select the recording date.
≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press or .
3
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press or .
•
Rotating to the left returns to calendar playback.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
455
• The card to display cannot be switched during calendar display.
• The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
456
Group Images
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are
handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on
a group basis.
(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are
deleted.)
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera
Group images saved with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving].
Group images recorded with Focus Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop Motion Shooting.
Group images recorded with [Segmented File
Recording].
1/9991/9991/999
SLFSLFSLF
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
457
Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One
Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
1 Select the group image in the playback state. (
Playing Back Pictures: 444)
2 Press 4 to display the images in the group.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
3 Press 21 to select an image.
• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 or touch [ ] again.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
458
Deleting Images
1
Press [ ] in playback state.
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
• You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot.
• If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
459
2
Press 34 to select the deletion method and then press
or .
[Delete Single]
Deletes the selected image.
[Delete Multi]
Selecting and deleting multiple images.
1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and then press or .
• [ ] is displayed for the selected image.
• If you press or again, the selection is canceled.
• Up to 100 images can be selected.
2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
• To switch the card selected for deleting images, press [ ] and then select the
card slot.
• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to
delete them.
• You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation screen
when deleting:
[]
[ ] [Delete Confirmation] ([Delete Confirmation]: 608)
• All images on the card can be deleted:
[]
[ ] [Delete All Images] ([Delete All Images]: 608)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
460
[RAW Processing]
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
1
Select [RAW Processing].
≥ [ ] [ ] [RAW Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
•
When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the
group.
Press 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.
• The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.
6HW
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
461
3
Select a setting item.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press or .
4
Change the setting.
≥Rotate , , or .
•
The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
5
Confirm the setting.
≥Press or .
≥The screen of Step
3
reappears.
To set another item, repeat Steps
3
to
5
.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
462
6
Save the image.
≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press or
.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
463
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[Begin Processing] Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with
the same setting as at the time of recording.
• If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection
screen, the white balance adjustment screen
appears.
• If you press 3 while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the
color temperature setting screen appears.
[Brightness correction]
Corrects the brightness.
• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the
effect of exposure compensation during recording.
[Photo Style]
Selects a Photo Style.
• If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee
setting screen appears. (
Recording While
Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 360
)
• You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded
with [V-Log L]. You cannot select [V-Log L] for
images not recorded with [V-Log L].
• You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike
D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images recorded with
[Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select
[Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images not
recorded with Photo Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike
V2].
1 4
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
464
[i.Dynamic Range] Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].
[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color Tone] Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Hue] Adjusts the hue.
[Filter Effect] Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect] Selects a grain effect setting.
[Color Noise] Color can be added with a grainy texture.
[Noise Reduction] Sets noise reduction.
[Sharpness] Adjusts the sharpness.
[More Settings]
[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones
from the time of recording.
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from
[sRGB] or [AdobeRGB].
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
[Destination Card Slot]: You can select the card slot
to which to save images processed with RAW. When
[AUTO] is selected, the image is saved to the same
card slot as the RAW format image to be processed.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
465
• The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
—
——
——
——
——
([Saturation])
— —
([Color Tone])
—— ——
— —
—— ——
— ——
— ———
S
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
466
Displaying a Comparison Screen
You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
1 Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step
4
.
• The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center.
• Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it.
Touching [ ] returns to the original display.
• A comparison screen cannot be displayed while [Noise Reduction] or
[Sharpness] is selected.
2 Rotate , , or to change the setting.
3 Press or to confirm the setting.
• RAW images recorded with the camera are recorded in the [L] size of [4:3].
With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of
view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording.
• The [White Balance] item is fixed to the setting from the time of recording for
pictures recorded with multiple exposures.
• The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
(A)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Divide]
467
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video or 6K/4K burst file into two.
1
Select [Video Divide].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Video Divide]
2
Select and play the image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
•
Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided.
Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
• Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process.
The images may be lost.
6HW
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Divide]
468
3
Pause playback at the position you wish to divide.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (frame-by-frame rewind or
frame-by-frame forward).
4
Divide the video.
≥Press or .
≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].
•
Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
• Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
• [Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File
Recording].
469
13. Camera Customization
≥Fn Buttons: 471
≥[Dial Operation Switch]: 487
≥Quick Menu Customization: 490
≥Custom Mode: 498
≥My Menu: 503
≥[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 505
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
Change how buttons, dials, etc. on the camera are to be operated.
≥[Fn Button Set] (Fn Buttons: 471)
≥[Dial Operation Switch Setup] ([Dial Operation Switch]: 487)
Register the currently set information of the camera.
≥Custom mode (Custom Mode: 498)
13. Camera Customization
470
Change menu display items.
≥Quick menu (Quick Menu Customization: 490)
≥My Menu (My Menu: 503)
Import camera settings information onto another camera.
≥[Save/Restore Camera Setting] ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 505)
•
Detailed settings for camera operations and screen display are available in the
[Custom] menu. (
[Custom] Menu: 548)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
471
Fn Buttons
≥Fn Button Default Settings: 472
≥Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 474
≥Use the Fn Buttons: 485
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you
can register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in
the same way as with the Fn buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
472
Fn Button Default Settings
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(1) [Fn2] [Preview] [No Setting]
(2) [WB] [White Balance] [No Setting]
(3) [ISO] [Sensitivity] [No Setting]
(4) [] [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting]
(5) [] [Photo Style] [No Setting]
(6)
Video rec.
button
[Video Record] [Video Record]
(7) [LVF] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]
(8) [AF ON] [AF-ON] [Rating¿3]
(9) [] [AF Mode] [Card Slot Change]
(10) [Q] [Q.MENU] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
(11)
[Fn1]/[ ]/
[]
[Level Gauge]
• Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) (9)
(10) (11)
(7) (8)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
473
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(12)
[Fn3] [Wi-Fi]
• Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
[Fn4] [Histogram]
[Fn5] [Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Fn6]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
[Fn7]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
(13) [No Setting]
(14) [No Setting]
(12) (13) (14)
[Fn8]
[Fn9]
[Fn11]
[Fn12]
[Fn10]
[Fn14]
[Fn13]
[Fn15]
[Fn16]
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
474
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
1
Select [Fn Button Set].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode]/
[Setting in PLAY mode]
2
Select the button.
≥Press 34 to select the button and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
• Press [DISP.] to change the page.
• With default settings, [Fn8] to [Fn12] on the joystick cannot be used.
When using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu to [Fn]. (
[Joystick Setting]: 563)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
475
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC
mode]): 477, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY
mode]): 483) and then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [3].
4
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
• Select items with [N] by selecting the item again.
• Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
476
• You can also touch [ ] on the control panel (Recording Screen: 88) to
display the screen in Step
2
.
• You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step
4
.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
Fn
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
477
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
• [Exposure Comp.] (
Exposure Compensation: 269)
• [Sensitivity] (
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
• [White Balance] (
White Balance (WB): 278)
• [Photo Style] (
[Photo Style]: 285)
• [Metering Mode] (
[Metering Mode]: 252)
• [Aspect Ratio] (
[Aspect Ratio]: 114)
• [Picture Quality] (
[Picture Quality]: 116)
• [Picture Size] (
[Picture Size]: 115)
• [1 Shot Spot Metering]
– Records with the metering mode set to [ ] (Spot metering) once only.
• [Long Exposure NR] (
[Long Exposure NR]: 519)
• [Min. Shutter Speed] (
[Min. Shutter Speed]: 520)
• [1 Shot RAW+JPG]
– Records a RAW image and a JPEG image simultaneously once only.
• [i.Dynamic Range] (
[i.Dynamic Range]: 536)
• [Filter Effect] (
[Filter Settings]: 293)
• [One Push AE]
– Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to the settings suited for the correct
exposure determined by the camera.
• [Touch AE] (
Touch AE: 111)
• [Exposure Mode] (
Creative Video Mode: 330)
• [Synchro Scan] (
[Synchro Scan]: 410)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
478
[Focus/Shutter]
• [AF Mode] (
Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 132)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355)
• [Focus Peaking] (
[Focus Peaking]: 541)
• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] (
[Focus Peaking]: 541)
• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 541)
• [Focus Ring Lock] (
[Focus Ring Lock]: 555)
• [AE LOCK] (
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
• [AF LOCK] (
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
• [AF/AE LOCK] (
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
• [AF-ON]
– AF works.
• [AF-ON : Near Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to close-up subjects.
• [AF-ON : Far Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to distant subjects.
• [AF-Point Scope] (
Magnify the AF Area Position ([AF-Point Scope]): 131)
• [Focus Area Set]
– Displays the AF area/MF Assist transition screen.
[Flash]
• [Flash Mode] (
[Flash Mode]: 309)
• [Flash Adjust.] (
[Flash Adjust.]: 313)
• [Wireless Flash Setup] (
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
479
[Others (Photo)]
• [Drive Mode Setting] (
Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
• [1 Shot "6K/4K PHOTO"]
– Performs 6K/4K photo recording only once.
• [Bracketing] (
Bracket Recording: 231)
• [Silent Mode] (
[Silent Mode]: 239)
• [Image Stabilizer] (
Image Stabilizer: 243)
• [Shutter Type] (
[Shutter Type]: 240)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (
Extended Tele Conversion: 176)
[Image Format]
• [Rec. File Format] (
[Rec. File Format]: 337)
• [Rec Quality] (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
• [Rec Quality (My List)] (
[add to list]: 346)
• [Variable Frame Rate] (
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
• [Time Code Display] (
Setting the Time Code: 350)
[2] tab
[Audio]
• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364)
• [Mute Sound Input] (
[Mute Sound Input]: 365)
• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 366)
• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 439)
• [Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]
– Sets the sound pickup range for [MANUAL] in [Special Mic.]. (
Setting the Sound
Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 437
)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
480
[Others (Video)]
• [Image Stabilizer] (
Image Stabilizer: 243)
• [E-Stabilization (Video)] (
[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 246)
• [Boost I.S. (Video)] (
[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 246)
• [Image Area of Video] (
[Image Area of Video]: 348)
• [Focus Transition] (
[Focus Transition]: 386)
• [Live Cropping] (
[Live Cropping]: 390)
[Operation]
• [Q.MENU] (
Quick Menu: 91)
• [Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the playback screen.
• [Video Record] (
Recording Videos: 325)
• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (
[Eye Sensor]: 587)
• [Operation Lock]
– A certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation to be disabled in
[Operation Lock Setup] (
[Operation Lock Setup]: 560).
• [Dial Operation Switch] (
Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 489)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
481
[Monitor / Display]
• [Preview] (
Preview Mode: 267)
• [Preview Aperture Effect]
– The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed.
• [Constant Preview] (
[Constant Preview]: 565)
• [Level Gauge] (
[Level Gauge]: 573)
• [Histogram] (
[Histogram]: 566)
• [Luminance Spot Meter] (
[Luminance Spot Meter]: 573)
• [Frame Marker] (
[Frame Marker]: 379)
• [Photo Grid Line] (
[Photo Grid Line]: 567)
• [Live View Boost] (
[Live View Boost]: 568)
• [Monochrome Live View] (
[Monochrome Live View]: 576)
• [Night Mode] (
[Night Mode]: 569)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
– Switches the displayed monitor or viewfinder display style.
• [Video-Priority Display] (
[Video-Priority Display]: 577)
• [Zebra Pattern] (
[Zebra Pattern]: 377)
• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [LUT Select] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• [Sheer Overlay] (
[Sheer Overlay]: 572)
• [I.S. Status Scope] (
[I.S. Status Scope]: 572)
• [WFM/Vector Scope] (
[WFM/Vector Scope]: 577)
• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407)
• [Color Bars] (
Color bars/Test Tone: 380)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
482
[Lens / Others]
• [Focus Ring Control] (
[Focus Ring Control]: 581)
• [Zoom Control]
– You can operate zoom when using an interchangeable lens that supports the
power zoom.
• [Step Zoom] (
[Power Zoom Lens]: 180)
• [Zoom Speed] (
[Power Zoom Lens]: 180)
• [Lens Information] (
[Lens Information]: 249)
[Card/File]
• [Destination Card Slot]
– Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot
Function] (
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118) is set to [Relay Rec].
[3] tab
[IN/OUT]
• [Wi-Fi] (
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth: 610)
[Others]
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
• [Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (
Fn Button Default Settings: 472)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
483
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])
[1] tab
[Playback Mode]
• [Magnify from AF Point] (
[Magnify from AF Point]: 600)
• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407)
[Process Image]
• [RAW Processing] (
[RAW Processing]: 460)
• [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]: 206)
[Add/Delete Info.]
• [Delete Single] (
Deleting Images: 458)
• [Protect] (
[Protect]: 604)
• [Rating¿1] (
[Rating]: 604)
• [Rating¿2] (
[Rating]: 604)
• [Rating¿3] (
[Rating]: 604)
• [Rating¿4] (
[Rating]: 604)
• [Rating¿5] (
[Rating]: 604)
[Edit Image]
• [Copy] (
[Copy]: 607)
[Operation]
• [Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the recording screen.
• [LVF/Monitor Switch]
• [Video Record] (
Recording Videos: 325)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
484
[Monitor / Display]
• [Night Mode] (
[Night Mode]: 569)
[Card/File]
• [Card Slot Change] (
Switching the Card to Display: 445)
[IN/OUT]
• [Wi-Fi] (
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth: 610)
• [Send Image (Smartphone)] (
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations: 653
)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
[2] tab
[Others]
• [6K/4K Photo Play]
– Displays the screen to select pictures to save from a 6K/4K burst file.
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
• [Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (
Fn Button Default Settings: 472)
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
485
Use the Fn Buttons
During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, it enables usage
of the functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1
Press the Fn button.
2
Select a setting item.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
• Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu
item.
13. Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
486
Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons)
During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
1 Tou ch [ ].
2 Touch one of [Fn3] to [Fn7].
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON]
in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. ([Touch Settings]: 559)
13. Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
487
[Dial Operation Switch]
≥Register Functions to the Dials: 487
≥Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 489
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(rear dial).
Register Functions to the Dials
Register functions to each of and .
1
Select [Dial Operation Switch Setup].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[ ]/[ ]
2
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
13. Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
488
Functions That Can Be Registered
• [Exposure Comp.] (
Exposure Compensation: 269)
• [Sensitivity]
*1
(
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
• [White Balance]
*2
(
White Balance (WB): 278)
• [Photo Style] (
[Photo Style]: 285)
• [Aspect Ratio] (
[Aspect Ratio]: 114)
• [i.Dynamic Range] (
[i.Dynamic Range]: 520)
• [Filter Effect] (
[Filter Settings]: 293)
• [AF Mode] (
Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
• [Flash Mode] (
[Flash Mode]: 309)
• [Flash Adjust.] (
[Flash Adjust.]: 313)
*1 default setting
*2 default setting
13. Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
489
Temporarily Change Dial Operation
Use the Fn button to temporarily change dial operation.
1
Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 471
)
2
Switch dial operation.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
≥A guide will display the functions registered to and .
• If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide
disappears.
3
Set the registered function.
≥Rotate or while the guide is displayed.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
490
Quick Menu Customization
≥Register to the Quick Menu: 490
You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.
Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and
their order to suit your preferences.
•
For information about Quick menu operation methods (
Quick Menu: 91)
Register to the Quick Menu
Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
These can be set separately for [ ] mode (Video) and for other
recording modes (Photo).
1
Select [Q.MENU Settings].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Q.MENU Settings] [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
491
2
Select the item position (1 to 12).
≥Press 3421 to select the position and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Menu Items That Can Be Registered: 493) and
then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
492
4
Register menu items.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
• Select items with [N] by selecting the item again.
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
493
Menu Items That Can Be Registered
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
• [Exposure Comp.] (
Exposure Compensation: 269)
• [Sensitivity] (
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
• [White Balance] (
White Balance (WB): 278)
• [Photo Style] (
[Photo Style]: 285)
• [Metering Mode] (
[Metering Mode]: 252)
• [Aspect Ratio] (
[Aspect Ratio]: 114)
• [Picture Quality] (
[Picture Quality]: 116)
• [Picture Size] (
[Picture Size]: 115)
• [Long Exposure NR] (
[Long Exposure NR]: 519)
• [Min. Shutter Speed] (
[Min. Shutter Speed]: 520)
• [i.Dynamic Range] (
[i.Dynamic Range]: 536)
• [Filter Effect] (
[Filter Settings]: 293)
• [Exposure Mode] (
Creative Video Mode: 330)
• [Synchro Scan] (
[Synchro Scan]: 410)
[Focus/Shutter]
• [AF Mode] (
Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 132)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355)
• [Focus Peaking] (
[Focus Peaking]: 541)
• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] (
[Focus Peaking]: 541)
• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 541)
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
494
[Flash]
• [Flash Mode] (
[Flash Mode]: 309)
• [Flash Adjust.] (
[Flash Adjust.]: 313)
• [Wireless Flash Setup] (
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
[Others (Photo)]
• [Drive Mode Setting] (
Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
• [Bracketing] (
Bracket Recording: 231)
• [Silent Mode] (
[Silent Mode]: 239)
• [Image Stabilizer] (
Image Stabilizer: 243)
• [Shutter Type] (
[Shutter Type]: 240)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (
Extended Tele Conversion: 176)
[Image Format]
• [Rec. File Format] (
[Rec. File Format]: 337)
• [Rec Quality] (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
• [Rec Quality (My List)] (
[add to list]: 346)
• [Variable Frame Rate] (
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
• [Time Code Display] (
Setting the Time Code: 350)
[Audio]
• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364)
• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 366)
• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 439)
• [Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]
– Sets the sound pickup range for [MANUAL] in [Special Mic.]. (
Setting the Sound
Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 437
)
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
495
[Others (Video)]
• [Image Stabilizer] (
Image Stabilizer: 243)
• [E-Stabilization (Video)] (
[E-Stabilization (Video)]: 246)
• [Boost I.S. (Video)] (
[Boost I.S. (Video)]: 246)
• [Image Area of Video] (
[Image Area of Video]: 348)
• [Focus Transition] (
[Focus Transition]: 386)
• [Live Cropping] (
[Live Cropping]: 390)
[2] tab
[Monitor / Display]
• [Constant Preview] (
[Constant Preview]: 565)
• [Level Gauge] (
[Level Gauge]: 573)
• [Histogram] (
[Histogram]: 566)
• [Luminance Spot Meter] (
[Luminance Spot Meter]: 573)
• [Frame Marker] (
[Frame Marker]: 379)
• [Photo Grid Line] (
[Photo Grid Line]: 567)
• [Live View Boost] (
[Live View Boost]: 568)
• [Monochrome Live View] (
[Monochrome Live View]: 576)
• [Night Mode] (
[Night Mode]: 569)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
– Switches the displayed monitor or viewfinder display style.
• [Video-Priority Display] (
[Video-Priority Display]: 577)
• [Zebra Pattern] (
[Zebra Pattern]: 377)
• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
• [Sheer Overlay] (
[Sheer Overlay]: 572)
• [I.S. Status Scope] (
[I.S. Status Scope]: 572)
• [WFM/Vector Scope] (
[WFM/Vector Scope]: 577)
• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] (
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407)
• [Color Bars] (
Color bars/Test Tone: 380)
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
496
[Lens / Others]
• [Focus Ring Control] (
[Focus Ring Control]: 581)
• [Step Zoom] (
[Power Zoom Lens]: 180)
• [Zoom Speed] (
[Power Zoom Lens]: 180)
• [Lens Information] (
[Lens Information]: 249)
[Card/File]
• [Destination Card Slot]
– Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot
Function] (
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118) is set to [Relay Rec].
[IN/OUT]
• [Wi-Fi] (
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth: 610)
[Others]
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using.
13. Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
497
Quick Menu Detailed Settings
Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of
during menu display.
[ ] [ ] Select [Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style]
Changes the appearance of the Quick menu.
[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu
simultaneously.
[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.
[Front Dial Assignment]
Changes the operation of in the Quick menu.
[Item]: Selects menu items.
[Value]: Selects setting values.
[Item Customize (Photo)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode
dial is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode
dial is set to [ ].
13. Camera Customization – Custom Mode
498
Custom Mode
≥Register in Custom Mode: 498
≥Using Custom Mode: 501
≥Calling Up Settings: 502
Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be
registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching
the mode dial to [C1] to [C4] modes.
Register in Custom Mode
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1
Set menu settings of the state you wish to save.
2
Select [Save to Custom Mode].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Save to Custom Mode]
13. Camera Customization – Custom Mode
499
3
Register.
≥Select the save-to number and then press or .
•
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.] to change the Custom
mode name.
How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.
• List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (
List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 771
)
13. Camera Customization – Custom Mode
500
Custom Mode Detailed Settings
You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain
temporarily changed settings details.
[ ] [ ] Select [Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
Sets the number of Custom modes that can be
registered in [C4].
A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are
available as default settings.
[Edit Title]
Changes the Custom mode name.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A
two-byte character is treated as two characters.
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters:
609
)
[How to Reload Custom
Mode]
Sets the timing at which to return the settings that
were changed temporarily while the Custom mode
was being used to their registered settings.
[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep
Mode]/[Turn the Power ON]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom
Mode].
[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of
aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
settings.
[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance
settings.
13. Camera Customization – Custom Mode
501
Using Custom Mode
1
Set the mode dial to one of [C1] to [C4].
≥If [C4], the last-used Custom mode will be called up.
[C4] Custom Mode Selection
1 Set the mode dial to [C4].
2 Press .
3 Press 34 to select the Custom mode and then press or .
• The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.
Changing Registered Details
Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C4].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom
Mode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
13. Camera Customization – Custom Mode
502
Calling Up Settings
Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode
and overwrite the current settings with the called up settings.
1
Set to the mode dial to use.
2
Select [Load Custom Mode].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Load Custom Mode]
3
Select the Custom mode to call up.
≥Select the Custom mode and then press or .
• Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] modes and those created from [ ] mode.
13. Camera Customization – My Menu
503
My Menu
≥Registration in My Menu: 503
≥Edit My Menu: 504
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.
A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ].
Registration in My Menu
1
Select [Add].
≥ [ ] [ ] [Add]
2
Register.
≥Select the menu to register and then press or .
13. Camera Customization – My Menu
504
Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
[ ] [ ]/[ ]/[ ] Registered menus
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
[ ] Select [ ]
[Add]
Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My
Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My Menu]
Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
13. Camera Customization – [Save/Restore Camera Setting]
505
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
[ ] [ ] Select [Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
• If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an
existing file, select that existing file.
• When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name
to save as is displayed.
[OK]:
Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file name]:
Changes the file name and saves the file.
• Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case),
numerals, up to 8 characters
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
[Load]
Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the
camera.
[Delete] Deletes settings information on the card.
[Keep Settings
While Format]
When formatting the card, formats the card while keeping
camera settings information stored on the card.
13. Camera Customization – [Save/Restore Camera Setting]
506
• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
• Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.
• List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (
List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 771
)
507
14. Menu Guide
≥List of Menu: 508
≥[Photo] Menu: 518
≥[Video] Menu: 534
≥[Custom] Menu: 548
≥[Setup] Menu: 583
≥[Playback] Menu: 597
≥Entering Characters: 609
This chapter provides a list of menus and describes them in detail.
•
For information about menu operation methods (
Menu Operation Methods: 95)
• Refer to the “
18. Materials” chapter for the following list:
–
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 771
– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 790
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
508
List of Menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings are
synchronized.
[Photo] menu
[Image Quality] (
[Photo] menu ([Image Quality]): 518)
≥[Photo Style]: 518
≥[Metering Mode]: 518
≥[Aspect Ratio]: 519
≥[Picture Quality]: 519
≥[Picture Size]: 519
≥[Long Exposure NR]: 519
≥[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 520
≥[Min. Shutter Speed]: 520
≥[i.Dynamic Range]: 520
≥[Vignetting Comp.]: 521
≥[Diffraction Compensation]: 521
≥[Filter Settings]: 522
[Focus] (
[Photo] menu ([Focus]): 523)
≥[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 523
≥[AF Assist Light]: 523
≥[Focus Peaking]: 524
≥[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 524
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
509
[Flash] ([Photo] menu ([Flash]): 525)
≥[Flash Mode]: 525
≥[Firing Mode]: 525
≥[Flash Adjust.]: 525
≥[Flash Synchro]: 525
≥[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 526
≥[Auto Exposure Comp.]: 526
≥[Wireless]: 526
≥[Wireless Channel]: 526
≥[Wireless FP]: 527
≥[Communication Light]: 527
≥[Wireless Setup]: 527
[Others (Photo)] ([Photo] menu ([Others (Photo)]): 528)
≥[Bracketing]: 528
≥[Silent Mode]: 528
≥[Image Stabilizer]: 528
≥[Burst Rate]: 529
≥[Shutter Type]: 529
≥[Shutter Delay]: 529
≥[Ex. Tele Conv.]: 530
≥[Time Lapse/Animation]: 530
≥[Self Timer]: 530
≥[6K/4K PHOTO]: 531
≥[Post-Focus]: 531
≥[Multiple Exposure]: 531
≥[Time Stamp Rec.]: 533
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
510
[Video] menu
[Image Quality] (
[Video] menu ([Image Quality]): 534)
≥[Exposure Mode]: 534
≥[Photo Style]: 534
≥[Metering Mode]: 535
≥[ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 535
≥[Synchro Scan]: 535
≥[Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 535
≥[Master Pedestal Level]: 536
≥[SS/Gain Operation]: 536
≥[i.Dynamic Range]: 536
≥[Vignetting Comp.]: 536
≥[Diffraction Compensation]: 537
≥[Filter Settings]: 537
[Image Format] (
[Video] menu ([Image Format]): 538)
≥[Rec. File Format]: 538
≥[Image Area of Video]: 538
≥[Rec Quality]: 538
≥[Rec Quality (My List)]: 538
≥[Variable Frame Rate]: 538
≥[Time Code]: 539
≥[Luminance Level]: 539
[Focus] ([Video] menu ([Focus]): 540)
≥[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 540
≥[Continuous AF]: 540
≥[AF Assist Light]: 540
≥[Focus Peaking]: 541
≥[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 541
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
511
[Audio] ([Video] menu ([Audio]): 542)
≥[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 542
≥[Mute Sound Input]: 542
≥[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 542
≥[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 542
≥[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 543
≥[Wind Noise Canceller]: 543 / [Wind Cut]: 543
≥[Lens Noise Cut]: 543
≥[Special Mic.]: 543
≥[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]: 544
≥[Sound Output]: 544
≥[Headphone Volume]: 544
[Others (Video)] ([Video] menu ([Others (Video)]): 545)
≥[Silent Mode]: 545
≥[Image Stabilizer]: 545
≥[Self Timer Setting]: 545
≥[Focus Transition]: 546
≥[Loop Recording (video)]: 546
≥[Segmented File Recording]: 546
≥[Live Cropping]: 547
≥[Time Stamp Rec.]: 547
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
512
[Custom] menu
[Image Quality] (
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 549)
≥[Photo Style Settings]: 549
≥[ISO Increments]: 549
≥[Extended ISO]: 550
≥[Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 550
≥[Color Space]: 551
≥[Exposure Comp. Reset]: 551
≥[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 551
≥[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 552
[Focus/Shutter] ([Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 553)
≥[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 553
≥[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 553
≥[AF/AE Lock Hold]: 553
≥[AF+MF]: 554
≥[MF Assist]: 554
≥[MF Guide]: 555
≥[Focus Ring Lock]: 555
≥[Show/Hide AF Mode]: 555
≥[Pinpoint AF Setting]: 556
≥[AF-Point Scope Setting]: 556
≥[Shutter AF]: 556
≥[Half-Press Shutter]: 556
≥[Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 557
≥[Quick AF]: 557
≥[Eye Sensor AF]: 557
≥[Looped Focus Frame]: 557
≥[AFC Start Point (225-Area)]: 558
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
513
[Operation] ([Custom] menu ([Operation]): 559)
≥[Q.MENU Settings]: 559
≥[Touch Settings]: 559
≥[Operation Lock Setup]: 560
≥[Fn Button Set]: 560
≥[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 561
≥[ISO Displayed Setting]: 561
≥[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 561
≥[Dial Set.]: 562
≥[Joystick Setting]: 563
≥[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]: 563
[Monitor / Display (Photo)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Photo)]): 564)
≥[Auto Review]: 564
≥[Constant Preview]: 565
≥[Histogram]: 566
≥[Photo Grid Line]: 567
≥[AF Area Display]: 567
≥[Live View Boost]: 568
≥[Night Mode]: 569
≥[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 570
≥[Expo.Meter]: 571
≥[Focal Length]: 571
≥[Blinking Highlights]: 571
≥[Sheer Overlay]: 572
≥[I.S. Status Scope]: 572
≥[Level Gauge]: 573
≥[Luminance Spot Meter]: 573
≥[Framing Outline]: 573
≥[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 574
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
514
[Monitor / Display (Video)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]): 575)
≥[V-LogL View Assist]: 575
≥[HLG View Assist]: 575
≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 575
≥[Monochrome Live View]: 576
≥[Center Marker]: 576
≥[Frame Marker]: 576
≥[Zebra Pattern]: 576
≥[WFM/Vector Scope]: 577
≥[Color Bars]: 577
≥[Video-Priority Display]: 577
≥[Red REC Frame Indicator]: 578
≥[Streaming Blue Frame Indicator]: 578
[IN/OUT] ([Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 579)
≥[HDMI Rec Output]: 579
[Lens / Others] ([Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 580)
≥[Lens Focus Resume]: 580
≥[Power Zoom Lens]: 580
≥[Lens Fn Button Setting]: 580
≥[Aperture Ring Increment]: 581
≥[Focus Ring Control]: 581
≥[Lens Information]: 582
≥[Lens Info. Confirmation]: 582
≥[Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 582
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
515
[Setup] menu
[Card/File] (
[Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 583)
≥[Card Format]: 583
≥[Double Card Slot Function]: 583
≥[Folder / File Settings]: 583
≥[File Number Reset]: 584
≥[Copyright Information]: 584
[Monitor / Display] ([Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 585)
≥[Power Save Mode]: 585
≥[Monitor Frame Rate]: 585
≥[LVF Frame Rate]: 586
≥[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 586
≥[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]: 587
≥[Eye Sensor]: 587
≥[Level Gauge Adjust.]: 587
[IN/OUT] ([Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 588)
≥[Beep]: 588
≥[Headphone Volume]: 588
≥[Wi-Fi]: 588
≥[Bluetooth]: 589
≥[USB]: 589
≥[Battery Use Priority]: 590
≥[HDMI Connection]: 590
≥[Power/Network Indicator]: 591
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
516
[Setting] ([Setup] menu ([Setting]): 592)
≥[Save to Custom Mode]: 592
≥[Load Custom Mode]: 592
≥[Custom Mode Settings]: 592
≥[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 593
≥[Reset]: 593
[Others] ([Setup] menu ([Others]): 594)
≥[Clock Set]: 594
≥[Time Zone]: 594
≥[System Frequency]: 595
≥[Pixel Refresh]: 595
≥[Sensor Cleaning]: 595
≥[Language]: 596
≥[Firmware Version]: 596
≥[Online Manual]: 596
≥[Approved Regulations]: 596
[My Menu]
[Page 1] (
My Menu: 503)
[Page 2] (My Menu: 503)
[Page 3] (
My Menu: 503)
[Edit My Menu] (Edit My Menu: 504)
≥[Add]
≥[Sorting]
≥[Delete]
≥[Display from My Menu]
14. Menu Guide – List of Menu
517
[Playback] menu
[Playback Mode] (
[Playback] menu ([Playback Mode]): 599)
≥[Playback Mode]: 599
≥[Slide Show]: 599
≥[Rotate Disp.]: 600
≥[Picture Sort]: 600
≥[Magnify from AF Point]: 600
≥[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 600
≥[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 601
≥[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 601
[Process Image] ([Playback] menu ([Process Image]): 602)
≥[RAW Processing]: 602
≥[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]: 602
≥[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]: 602
≥[Time Lapse Video]: 603
≥[Stop Motion Video]: 603
[Add/Delete Info.] ([Playback] menu ([Add/Delete Info.]): 604)
≥[Protect]: 604
≥[Rating]: 604
[Edit Image] ([Playback] menu ([Edit Image]): 605)
≥[Resize]: 605
≥[Rotate]: 606
≥[Video Divide]: 606
≥[Copy]: 607
[Others] ([Playback] menu ([Others]): 608)
≥[Delete Confirmation]: 608
≥[Delete All Images]: 608
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
518
[Photo] Menu
≥[Photo] menu ([Image Quality]): 518
≥[Photo] menu ([Focus]): 523
≥[Photo] menu ([Flash]): 525
≥[Photo] menu ([Others (Photo)]): 528
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings are
synchronized.
[Photo] menu ([Image Quality])
: Default settings
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[Standard] / [Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] / [Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] /
[Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] / [L.Monochrome S] / [Cinelike
D2] / [Cinelike V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log L] / [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and expression
styles.
(
[Photo Style]: 285)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
(
[Metering Mode]: 252)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
519
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[Long Exposure NR]
[4:3]/[3:2]/[16:9]/[1:1]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
(
[Aspect Ratio]: 114)
[FINE]/[STD.]/[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
(
[Picture Quality]: 116)
[L]/[M]/[S]
Sets the picture’s image size.
(
[Picture Size]: 115)
[ON]/[OFF]
The camera automatically removes noise generated when recording images with a
slow shutter speed.
• Recording is not possible during noise reduction.
• When the following functions are being used, [Long Exposure NR] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.+NR])/[Silent Mode]
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
520
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[Min. Shutter Speed]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200] to [12800]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400] to [25600]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
[AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]
Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations
where correct exposure cannot be achieved.
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between
the background and subject is great.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• When the following functions are being used, [i.Dynamic Range] is not available:
– [Like709]/[V-Log L]/[Hybrid Log Gamma] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
521
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[ON]/[OFF]
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can
record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
• When the following function is being used, [Vignetting Comp.] is not available:
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– [PIXEL/PIXEL] ([Image Area of Video])
– [Variable Frame Rate]
[AUTO]/[OFF]
The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by
diffraction when the aperture is closed.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
523
[Photo] menu ([Focus])
: Default settings
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[AF Assist Light]
[Set 1]/[Set 2]/[Set 3]/[Set 4]
Select features of AF operation when recording using [AFC] that are appropriate for
the subject and scene.
(
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 132)
[ON]/[OFF]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when you press
the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to focus.
• The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.5 m (11 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• Remove the lens hood.
• The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus
when a lens with large diameter is used.
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
524
[Focus Peaking]
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity]
[Display Color]
[Display During AFS]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines)
are highlighted with color.
• If the [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] is adjusted to the negative direction, portions to
be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to achieve a more precise focus.
• With [Display Color], you can set the display color of the in-focus portion.
• When [Display During AFS] is set to [ON], the Focus Peaking display is also
possible when the shutter button is pressed halfway in the [AFS] focus mode.
• You can display the Touch Tab (
[Touch Settings]: 559) and then touch [ ] in
[ ] to switch [ON]/[OFF].
• When [Rough Monochrome] of [Filter Settings] is being used, [Focus Peaking] is
not available.
• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Focus Peaking] is not available.
[FAST]/[NORMAL]
Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
525
[Photo] menu ([Flash])
: Default settings
[Flash Mode]
[Firing Mode]
[Flash Adjust.]
[Flash Synchro]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Sets the flash mode.
(
[Flash Mode]: 309)
[TTL]/[MANUAL]
You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
(
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 311)
[j3 EV] to [i3 EV] ([n0 EV])
When [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL], you can adjust the flash output.
(
[Flash Adjust.]: 313)
[1ST]/[2ND]
Sets the flash mode to Second Curtain Synchro.
(
[Flash Synchro]: 315)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
526
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
[Wireless]
[Wireless Channel]
[1/128] to [1/1]
When [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL], you can set the flash output.
(
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 311)
[ON]/[OFF]
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure compensation
value.
(
[Auto Exposure Comp.]: 316)
[ON]/[OFF]
Enables recording using a wireless flash.
(
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
[1CH]/[2CH]/[3CH]/[4CH]
Sets the channel to use when recording with a wireless flash.
(
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
527
[Wireless FP]
[Communication Light]
[Wireless Setup]
[ON]/[OFF]
Uses FP firing for an external flash when recording with a wireless flash.
(
[Wireless FP]: 323)
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
Set the strength of communication light.
(
[Communication Light]: 323)
[External Flash]
[Firing Mode]/[Flash Adjust.]/[Manual
Flash Adjust.]
[A Group]/[B Group]/[C Group]
[Firing Mode]/[Flash Adjust.]/[Manual
Flash Adjust.]
Sets details for wireless flash recording.
(
Setting Items ([Wireless Setup]): 321)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
528
[Photo] menu ([Others (Photo)])
: Default settings
[Bracketing]
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Bracketing Type] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
[More Settings]
You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting.
(
Bracket Recording: 231)
[ON]/[OFF]
Disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
(
[Silent Mode]: 239)
[Operation Mode] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])
Configures image stabilizer settings.
(
Image Stabilizer: 243)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
529
[Burst Rate]
[Shutter Type]
[Shutter Delay]
[H]/[M]/[L]
Sets the burst recording operation.
(
Taking Burst Pictures: 184)
[AUTO]/[MECH.]/[EFC]/[ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR]
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
(
[Shutter Type]: 240)
[8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released after the
specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.
• When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Delay] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
530
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
[Time Lapse/Animation]
[Self Timer]
[ZOOM]/[TELE CONV.]/[OFF]
You can take pictures that are further enlarged beyond what is available with the
optical zoom, without any deterioration in image quality.
(
Extended Tele Conversion: 176)
[Mode]
[Time Lapse Shot]
[Stop Motion Animation]
Time Lapse Shot automatically starts/stops recording at a set recording interval.
Stop Motion Animation enables you to take pictures while moving the subject little by
little.
(
Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 216, Recording with Stop Motion Animation:
221
)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc. (Custom)
[SET]
[Custom Time]
[Display Countdown]
Sets the self-timer duration.
(
Recording Using the Self-timer: 227)
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
531
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Post-Focus]
[Multiple Exposure]
[Picture Size / Burst Speed] [6K 18M]/[4K H 8M]/[4K 8M]
[Rec Method]
[6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]/[6K/
4K Pre-Burst]
[Pre-Burst Recording] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets 6K/4K photos.
You can save pictures extracted from a burst file taken using high-speed burst.
(
6K/4K Photo Recording: 190)
[6K 18M]/[4K 8M]
Taking burst pictures with the same image quality as 6K/4K photos while
automatically changing the focus point.
You can select the focus point for the picture to save after recording.
(
Post-Focus Recording: 207)
[Start]
[Auto Gain] [ON]/[OFF]
[Overlay] [ON]/[OFF]
You can apply an effect equivalent to four exposures on a single image.
[Start]: Starts exposure for multiple exposures.
[Auto Gain]: Automatically adjusts brightness in accordance with image count.
[Overlay]: Allows multiple exposure for recorded RAW images. After selecting
[Start], a selection screen for images to stack is displayed.
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
532
• After selecting [Start], pressing the shutter button fully starts multiple exposure.
• Preview is displayed for each recording, and the following operations are
available:
– [Next] (You can also perform the same operation by pressing the shutter button
halfway.)
– [Retake]
– [Exit]: Records the picture, and finishes multiple exposure recording.
• To finish multiple exposure recording before starting the recording, press [Q] on
the recording screen.
• Recording information for the last-recorded image will be saved as recording
information for images recorded with multiple exposures.
• [Overlay] can be set only for RAW images recorded with the camera.
• When the following functions are being used, [Multiple Exposure] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Filter Settings]
– HDMI output
([LW
5HWDNH
1H[W
14. Menu Guide – [Photo] Menu
533
[Time Stamp Rec.]
[ON]/[OFF]
Records the recorded date and time superimposed on the images.
• You cannot delete recording dates after superimposing them.
• The recorded date and time are not recorded in 6K/4K burst files or RAW images.
• When the following functions are being used, [Time Stamp Rec.] is not available:
– [Post-Focus]
– 6K/4K Anamorphic (4:3) video
– [Variable Frame Rate]
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
534
[Video] Menu
≥[Video] menu ([Image Quality]): 534
≥[Video] menu ([Image Format]): 538
≥[Video] menu ([Focus]): 540
≥[Video] menu ([Audio]): 542
≥[Video] menu ([Others (Video)]): 545
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings are
synchronized.
[Video] menu ([Image Quality])
: Default settings
[Exposure Mode]
[Photo Style]
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
Sets the exposure mode to use in [ ] mode.
(
Creative Video Mode: 330)
[Standard] / [Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] / [Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] /
[Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] / [L.Monochrome S] / [Cinelike
D2] / [Cinelike V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log L] / [Hybrid Log Gamma] / [MY PHOTO
STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and expression
styles.
(
[Photo Style]: 285)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
535
[Metering Mode]
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[Synchro Scan]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
(
[Metering Mode]: 252)
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200] to [6400]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400] to [12800]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
(
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 362)
[ON]/[OFF]
Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.
(
[Synchro Scan]: 410)
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video.
• This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON].
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
536
[Master Pedestal Level]
[SS/Gain Operation]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[j15] to [15] ([0])
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.
(
[Master Pedestal Level]: 358)
[SEC/ISO]/[ANGLE/ISO]/[SEC/dB]
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity) values.
(
[SS/Gain Operation]: 370)
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between
the background and subject is great.
(
[i.Dynamic Range]: 520)
[ON]/[OFF]
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can
record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
(
[Vignetting Comp.]: 521)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
537
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[AUTO]/[OFF]
The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by
diffraction when the aperture is closed.
(
[Diffraction Compensation]: 521)
[Filter Effect] [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] [ON]/[OFF]
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).
(
[Filter Settings]: 293)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
538
[Video] menu ([Image Format])
: Default settings
[Rec. File Format]
[Image Area of Video]
[Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality (My List)]
[Variable Frame Rate]
[MP4]/[MOV]
Sets the video recording file format.
(
[Rec. File Format]: 337)
[FULL]/[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Sets the image area during video recording.
(
[Image Area of Video]: 348)
Sets the video recording image quality.
(
[Rec Quality]: 338)
Calls up a recording quality registered in My List.
(
[add to list]: 346)
[ON]/[OFF]
Varies the recording frame rate to record slow motion video and fast motion video.
(
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
539
[Time Code]
[Luminance Level]
[Time Code Display] [ON]/[OFF]
[Count Up] [REC RUN]/[FREE RUN]
[Time Code Value]
[Reset]
[Manual Input]
[Current Time]
[Time Code Mode] [DF]/[NDF]
[HDMI Time Code Output] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
(
Time Code: 350)
[0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
(
[Luminance Level]: 357)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
540
[Video] menu ([Focus])
: Default settings
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Assist Light]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET] [AF Speed]/[AF Sensitivity]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using [Continuous AF].
(
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 355)
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
(
[Continuous AF]: 354)
[ON]/[OFF]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when you press
the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to focus.
(
[AF Assist Light]: 523)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
541
[Focus Peaking]
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity]
[Display Color]
[Display During AFS]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines)
are highlighted with color.
(
[Focus Peaking]: 524)
[FAST]/[NORMAL]
Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
(
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 524)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
542
[Video] menu ([Audio])
: Default settings
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Mute Sound Input]
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[ON]/[OFF]
The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
(
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364)
[ON]/[OFF]
This mutes audio input.
(
[Mute Sound Input]: 365)
[STANDARD]/[LOW]
This switches the gain of audio input.
(
[Sound Rec Gain Level]: 365)
[MUTE], [j18dB] to [i12dB] ([0dB])
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
(
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 366)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
543
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
[Wind Cut]
[Lens Noise Cut]
[Special Mic.]
[ON]/[OFF]
The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound distortion
(crackling noise).
(
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[OFF]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
(
[Wind Noise Canceller]: 367)
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
(
Reduction of Wind Noise: 438)
[ON]/[OFF]
You can reduce the zoom sound produced during video recording when you are
using interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.
(
[Lens Noise Cut]: 368)
[STEREO]/[LENS AUTO]/[SHOTGUN]/[S.SHOTGUN]/[MANUAL]
Sets the sound pickup range when using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional).
(
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 437)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
544
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
[Sound Output]
[Headphone Volume]
[96kHz/24bit]/[48kHz/24bit]/[48kHz/16bit]/[OFF]
Sets the audio input for when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is
attached.
(
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 439)
[REALTIME]/[REC SOUND]
Sets the audio output method when headphones are connected.
(
Switching the Sound Output Method: 442)
[0] to [LEVEL15] ([LEVEL3])
Adjusts the volume when headphones are connected.
(
Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 442)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
545
[Video] menu ([Others (Video)])
: Default settings
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Self Timer Setting]
[ON]/[OFF]
Disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
(
[Silent Mode]: 239)
[Operation Mode] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])
Configures image stabilizer settings.
(
Image Stabilizer: 243)
[Self Timer]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc. (Custom)
[SET]
[Custom Time]
[Display Countdown]
[Self Timer For Video] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets the self-timer duration.
(
Setting the Self-timer Time: 229)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
546
[Focus Transition]
[Loop Recording (video)]
[Segmented File Recording]
[Start]
[Focus Pull Setting] [1]/[2]/[3]
[Focus Transition Speed] [SH]/[H]/[M]/[L]/[SL]
[Focus Transition Rec] [1]/[2]/[3]/[OFF]
[Focus Transition Wait] [10SEC]/[5SEC]/[OFF]
Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a position
registered in advance.
(
[Focus Transition]: 386)
[ON]/[OFF]
When the recording fills the card to capacity, recording continues while deleting older
data.
(
[Loop Recording (video)]: 412)
[10MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]/[OFF]
Video is divided every few minutes while being recorded.
(
[Segmented File Recording]: 414)
14. Menu Guide – [Video] Menu
547
[Live Cropping]
[Time Stamp Rec.]
[40SEC]/[20SEC]/[OFF]
By cropping a part of the range displayed in the live view, it is possible to record FHD
video that incorporates panning and zooming with the camera staying in a fixed
position.
(
[Live Cropping]: 390)
[ON]/[OFF]
Records the recorded date and time superimposed on the images.
(
[Time Stamp Rec.]: 533)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
548
[Custom] Menu
≥[Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 549
≥[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 553
≥[Custom] menu ([Operation]): 559
≥[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 564
≥[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 575
≥[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 579
≥[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 580
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
549
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])
: Default settings
[Photo Style Settings]
[ISO Increments]
[Show/Hide Photo Style]
[Vivid]/[Natural]/[L.ClassicNeo]/[Flat]/
[Landscape]/[Portrait]/[L.Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome D]/[L.Monochrome S]/
[Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/[Like709]/
[V-Log L]/[Hybrid Log Gamma]/[MY
PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
[My Photo Style Settings]
[Add Effects]
[Load Preset Setting]
Enables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My Photo Style.
[Add Effects]: Enables [Sensitivity] and [White Balance] settings in image quality
adjustment.
[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image quality adjustment values
changed in My Photo Style are returned to their registered state.
[Reset Photo Style]
Returns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style Settings] to their default
settings.
[1/3 EV]/[1 EV]
Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment values.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
550
[Extended ISO]
[Exposure Offset Adjust.]
[ON]/[OFF]
Setting of ISO sensitivity to a minimum of [ISO100] is possible.
[Multi Metering] [j1EV] to [i1EV] ([n0EV])
[Center Weighted] [j1EV] to [i1EV] ([n0EV])
[Spot] [j1EV] to [i1EV] ([n0EV])
[Highlight Weighted] [j1EV] to [i1EV] ([n0EV])
Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each item of [Metering
Mode]. Adds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure compensation
value (
Exposure Compensation: 269) when recording.
• For video recording, [6K/4K PHOTO], and [Post-Focus], it is not possible to add an
adjustment value of a range that exceeds n3EV.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
551
[Color Space]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
[sRGB]/[AdobeRGB]
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on
the screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.
[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as
professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than
sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
• When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Like709]/[V-Log L] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
[ON]/[OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the recording mode or turn off the
camera.
[ON]/[OFF]
Selects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity for
the video being recorded in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with manually set values.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
552
[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.] [ ]/[ ]
[White Balance] [ ]/[ ]
[Photo Style] [ ]/[ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]/[ ]
[AF Mode] [ ]/[ ]
Content set in [ ] mode can be separated from when taking pictures.
(
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 334)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
553
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter])
: Default settings
[Focus/Shutter Priority]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[AFS] [FOCUS]/[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
[AFC] [FOCUS]/[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing
and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[ON]/[OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF Assist) for when the
camera is held vertically and when it is held horizontally.
(
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 166)
[ON]/[OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the button until it is pressed
again.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
554
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[ON]/[OFF]
When the focus mode is set to [AFS], you can fine-adjust the focus manually during
AF lock.
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway
• When [AF ON] is pressed
• When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE LOCK]
(When an interchangeable lens with a
focus ring is attached)
[Focus Ring]
[ON]/[OFF]
[AF Mode] [ON]/[OFF]
[Press Joystick] [ON]/[OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [FULL]/[PIP]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the lens.
[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[Press Joystick]: Press the joystick to enlarge the display. (if [Joystick Setting] is
set to [D.FOCUS Movement]) (
[Joystick Setting]: 563)
[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of
MF Assist (enlarged screen).
• While you are using the following functions, MF Assist will not be displayed:
– Video recording
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
555
[MF Guide]
[Focus Ring Lock]
[Show/Hide AF Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording distance, is displayed on
the screen. You can select from meters or feet for the display unit.
• The distance index of the [MF Guide] depends on the lens and zoom position. If
the lens does not support the display of the distance index, only the scale is
displayed on the MF guide.
[ON]/[OFF]
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus.
• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.
[Human/Animal Detect AF] [ON]/[OFF]
[Tracking] [ON]/[OFF]
[225-Area] [ON]/[OFF]
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Zone (Square)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Zone (Oval)] [ON]/[OFF]
[1-Area+] [ON]/[OFF]
[Pinpoint] [ON]/[OFF]
[Custom1] [ON]/[OFF]
[Custom2] [ON]/[OFF]
[Custom3] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
556
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[AF-Point Scope Setting]
[Shutter AF]
[Half-Press Shutter]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG]/[MID]/[SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL]/[PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode is [ ].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode)
of the enlarged screen.
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]/[OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL]/[PIP]
Changes the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope (
Magnify the AF Area
Position ([AF-Point Scope]): 131
).
[Keep Enlarged Display]: Setting this to [ON] maintains the enlarged screen after
pressing the Fn button until it is pressed again.
[PIP Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of the
enlarged screen.
[ON]/[OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway.
[ON]/[OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
557
[Assign REC to Shutter Button]
[Quick AF]
[Eye Sensor AF]
[Looped Focus Frame]
[ON]/[OFF]
Use the shutter button for the start/stop operation of video recording in the [ ]
mode.
The start/stop operation of video recording using the shutter button can be disabled
when set to [OFF].
[ON]/[OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically
adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
• The battery will drain faster than usual.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
[ON]/[OFF]
When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor operates, then AF will
function.
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.
[ON]/[OFF]
When moving the AF area or MF Assist, this enables its position to loop from one
edge to the other edge of the screen.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
559
[Custom] menu ([Operation])
: Default settings
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Touch Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1]/[MODE2]
[Front Dial Assignment] [Item]/[Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)]
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu.
(
Quick Menu Detailed Settings: 497)
[Touch Screen] [ON]/[OFF]
[Touch Tab] [ON]/[OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF]/[AF+AE]
[Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]/
[OFF]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a touched subject.
Alternatively, operation to optimize both the focus and brightness ([AF+AE]).
(
Moving the AF Area by Touch: 161)
[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder display. (
Moving the AF
Area Position with the Touch Pad: 163
)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
560
[Operation Lock Setup]
[Fn Button Set]
[Cursor] [ ]/[ ]
[Joystick] [ ]/[ ]
[Touch Screen] [ ]/[ ]
[Dial] [ ]/[ ]
[DISP. Button] [ ]/[ ]
This sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn button [Operation Lock].
(Only for recording screen)
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and
[Joystick]: Joystick
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]: , , and
[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button
[Setting in REC mode]
[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
(
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 474)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
561
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]
[ISO Displayed Setting]
[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
[WHILE PRESSING]/[AFTER PRESSING1]/[AFTER PRESSING2]
This sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White balance), [ISO] (ISO
sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure compensation) is pressed.
[WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding
the button. Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the
recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings. Press the button again
to confirm the settings value, and to return to the recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING2]: Press the button to change settings. Each press of the
button switches the settings value. (Except that of exposure compensation) To
confirm your selection and return to the recording screen, press the shutter button
halfway.
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ] / [ / ] / [OFF/ ] /
[ / ] / [ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [ ] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting].
[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)] []/[OFF]
This sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ] / [ / ] / [OFF/ ] / [ /
] / [ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you adjust flash output.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
562
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1]/[SET2]/[SET3]/[SET4]/[SET5]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed
[P] [A] [S] [M]
[SET1]
FSSF
FSSSS
[SET2]
—F—F
—SSSS
[SET3]
— — SS SS
F—F
[SET4]
——— F
FSSSS
[SET5]
FSSF
———SS
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]/[ ]
Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture value and shutter speed
adjustment.
[Control Dial Assignment]
[ ] ([Headphone Volume])/
[ / ] ([Exposure / Aperture])/
[ ] ([Exposure Comp.])/
[ ] ([Sensitivity])/
[ ] ([Focus Frame Size])
Sets the function to be assigned to on the recording screen.
[/]: In [M] mode, this assigns the operation to adjust the aperture value. In
other than [M] mode, this assigns the operation of exposure compensation.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
563
[Joystick Setting]
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
[Exposure Comp.] []/[]/[OFF]
Assigns exposure compensation to or . (Except in [M] mode)
• The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[]
[]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registered
temporarily to or . (
Register Functions to the Dials: 487)
[Rotation (Menu Operation)]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[]
Changes the rotational direction of the dials when operating menus.
[D.FOCUS Movement]/[Fn]/[MENU]/[OFF]
Sets the joystick movement on the recording screen.
[D.FOCUS Movement]: Moves the AF area and MF Assist. (
AF Area Movement
Operation: 158
, Record Using MF: 167)
[Fn]: Operates as Fn buttons.
[MENU]: Operates as . Operations that can be performed by moving the
joystick are disabled.
[OFF]: Disables the joystick.
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter Remote
Control (optional).
(
Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 711)
• [Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
564
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)])
: Default settings
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [HOLD]/[5SEC] to [0.5SEC]/[OFF]
[Duration Time (6K/4K PHOTO)] [HOLD]/[OFF]
[Duration Time (Post-Focus)] [HOLD]/[OFF]
[Playback Operation Priority] [ON]/[OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures.
[Duration Time (6K/4K PHOTO)]: Sets the Auto Review when recording 6K/4K
photos.
[Duration Time (Post-Focus)]: Sets the Auto Review when recording with
Post-Focus.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the
playback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.
• If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image recorded stays displayed
until the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
565
[Constant Preview]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Effect]
[Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in [A]/
[M] mode.
You can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time when in [M] mode.
• You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect in
[Effect].
• Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is
set to [ON].
• The preview of the shutter speed effect does not work when using a flash.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
566
[Histogram]
[ON]/[OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press 3421 to set the position.
• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the
number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
(A) Dark
(B) Bright
• When the recorded image and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in low light situations.
• When the following function is being used, the [Histogram] is not available:
– [WFM/Vector Scope]
• The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.
(A) (B)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
567
[Photo Grid Line]
[AF Area Display]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen.
When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the position.
• When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines on the recording
screen to move the position.
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the AF areas for the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to [ ] AF modes.
• AF areas are not displayed in the following cases:
– When [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] is not used during [ ]
– When AF area shapes are not registered in [ ] to [ ]
• When the following functions are being used, [AF Area Display] is not available:
– Video recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
ヤヒ
ヤピ
ヤヒ
ヤピ
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
568
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
[SET] [P/A/S/M]/[M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions
even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.
• You can change the recording mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using
[SET].
• This mode does not affect recorded images.
• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.
• This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for
example)
– When recording a video or 6K/4K photo
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant Preview] in the [M] mode
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
569
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [ON]/[OFF]
[LVF] [ON]/[OFF]
Displays the monitor and viewfinder in red.
In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the
surroundings difficult to see.
You can also set the luminance of the red display.
1 Press 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or viewfinder (LVF).
2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
• Display the monitor to adjust the monitor, and display the viewfinder to adjust
the viewfinder.
3 Press 21 to adjust luminance and then press or .
• This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
570
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] []/[]
[Monitor Disp. Set] []/[]
Selects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to
display over the entire screen.
[]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the
images.
[]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO]/[ON]/[OFF]
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO]/[ON]/[OFF]
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which
the monitor is opened or closed.
[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according to the angle to which the
monitor is rotated.
[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
• The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
571
[Expo.Meter]
[Focal Length]
[Blinking Highlights]
[ON]/[OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
• Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting
aperture, and setting shutter speed.
• If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter
disappears.
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.
[ON]/[OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking in black and white during Auto Review or
playback.
• The display without the highlights is added to the display shown when [DISP.] is
pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (
Playback Screen: 90)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
572
[Sheer Overlay]
[I.S. Status Scope]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Transparency]
[Image Select]
[Reset at Power Off]
[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]
Displays recorded pictures by overlapping on the recording screen.
• Use [Image Select] to select the pictures to be displayed.
Press 21 to select pictures and then press or to confirm.
• If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while
the shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.
• When the following functions are being used, [Sheer Overlay] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays a reference point (A) on the recording screen in order to let you check for
camera shake.
• When the following functions are being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
(A)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
573
[Level Gauge]
[Luminance Spot Meter]
[Framing Outline]
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt.
(A) Horizontal
(B) Vertical
(C) Green (no tilt)
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. n1o.
• When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge
may not be displayed correctly.
• You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge
Adjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. (
[Level Gauge Adjust.]: 587)
[ON]/[OFF]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area.
(
[Luminance Spot Meter]: 375)
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the outline for the live view.
(A)
(B)
(C)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
575
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
: Default settings
[V-LogL View Assist]
[HLG View Assist]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[Read LUT File]
[LUT Select]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [ON]/[OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON]/[OFF]
You can show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder, or output
them via HDMI.
(
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
[Monitor] [MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
[HDMI] [AUTO]/[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color
gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over
HDMI.
(
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
This displays the de-squeezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
(
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
576
[Monochrome Live View]
[Center Marker]
[Frame Marker]
[Zebra Pattern]
[ON]/[OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be
displayed in black and white.
• [Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.
[ON]/[OFF]
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [i].
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
[Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
(
[Frame Marker]: 379)
[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/[ZEBRA1+2]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Zebra 1]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed with stripes.
(
[Zebra Pattern]: 377)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
577
[WFM/Vector Scope]
[Color Bars]
[Video-Priority Display]
[WAVE]/[VECTOR]/[OFF]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen.
(
[WFM/Vector Scope]: 371)
[SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
(
Color bars/Test Tone: 380)
[ON]/[OFF]
When in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the
control panel to suit video recording, as with the [ ] mode.
The playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.
• When set to a setting where video recording is not available, such as [Post-Focus],
[Video-Priority Display] is fixed to [OFF].
• [Video-Priority Display] works only during video recording when using the following
functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Multiple Exposure]
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
578
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
[Streaming Blue Frame Indicator]
[ON]/[OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being
recorded.
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays a blue frame on the screen during streaming.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
579
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])
: Default settings
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] [ON]/[OFF]
[Down Convert]
[AUTO]/[4K/30p]([4K/25p])/[1080p]/
[1080i]/[OFF]
[HDMI Recording Control] [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound Down Convert] [AUTO]/[OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON]/[OFF]
[HDMI MF Assist Output] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets HDMI output during recording.(
HDMI Output Image Quality (Resolution/
Frame Rate): 429
, HDMI Output Settings: 432)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
580
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others])
: Default settings
[Lens Focus Resume]
[Power Zoom Lens]
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
[ON]/[OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off. When an interchangeable
lens that is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.
[Step Zoom] [ON]/[OFF]
[Zoom Speed]
[Photo]: [H]/[M]/[L]
[Video]: [H]/[M]/[L]
[Zoom Ring] [ON]/[OFF]
Sets the screen display and operation when using an interchangeable lens
compatible with power zoom. (
[Power Zoom Lens]: 180)
[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [Focus Ring Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE
LOCK] / [AF-ON] / [AF-ON : Near Shift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [AF-Point Scope] /
[Focus Area Set] / [Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture Effect] / [No
Setting] / [Off (Disable Press and Hold)] / [Restore to Default]
Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
• When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus button is being pressed.
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
581
[Aperture Ring Increment]
[Focus Ring Control]
[SMOOTH]/[1/3EV]
[SMOOTH]: You can finely adjust the aperture value.
[1/3EV]: You can adjust the aperture value in increments of 1/3 EV.
You can change the aperture adjustment increment by operating the aperture ring.
• This setting is available when an interchangeable lens that supports a click-less
aperture ring (H-X1025: optional) is attached (As of May 2021).
• When taking pictures, this setting will take effect if the aperture ring is set to a
position other than [A].
• If the position of the aperture ring is set to [A], the aperture value set by the
camera will take effect and can be adjusted like with [1/3EV].
• During video recording, fine adjustments can be made like with [SMOOTH].
• When [SMOOTH] is set, fractions of aperture values are not displayed on the
screen.
[NON-LINEAR]/[LINEAR]
[SET] [90°] to [360°] ([300°])/[Maximum]
Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using
supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the
focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of
the focus ring.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.
• For the latest information on lenses that support focus ring control, see the support
site below.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
14. Menu Guide – [Custom] Menu
582
[Lens Information]
[Lens Info. Confirmation]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)]
[Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera.
• This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo]
([Others (Photo)]) menu. (
[Lens Information]: 249)
[ON]/[OFF]
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with
this camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed
when you turn on the camera.
[ON]/[OFF]
You can set on the menu, whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation
information during video recording.
[ON]: Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the camera held
vertically will be automatically played vertically on the PC or smartphone etc. during
playback.
[OFF]: Does not record vertical orientation information.
• On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in
vertical orientation.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
583
[Setup] Menu
≥[Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 583
≥[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 585
≥[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 588
≥[Setup] menu ([Setting]): 592
≥[Setup] menu ([Others]): 594
[Setup] menu ([Card/File])
: Default settings
[Card Format]
[Double Card Slot Function]
[Folder / File Settings]
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Formats the card (initialization).
(
Formatting Cards (Initialization): 62)
[Recording Method] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
(
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118)
[Select Folder]/[Create a New Folder]/[File Name Setting]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
(
[Folder / File Settings]: 120)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
584
[File Number Reset]
[Copyright Information]
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Resets the file number of the next recording to 0001.
(
[File Number Reset]: 123)
[Artist] [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
[Copyright Holder] [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
[Display Copyright Info.]
The registered names of the artist and the copyright holder are recorded in the Exif
data of the image.
• You can register each name from [SET] in [Artist] and [Copyright Holder].
How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• Up to 63 characters may be entered.
• You can confirm registered copyright information in [Display Copyright Info.].
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
585
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])
: Default settings
[Power Save Mode]
[Monitor Frame Rate]
[Sleep Mode] [10MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]/[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON]/[OFF]
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]/[OFF]
[Power Save LVF Shooting]
[Time to Sleep]
[Method of Activation]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or
turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time. (
[Power
Save Mode]: 57
)
[30fps]/[60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording pictures.
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• When the following functions are being used, [Monitor Frame Rate] is not
available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– HDMI output
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
586
[LVF Frame Rate]
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]
[60fps]/[120fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording pictures.
[60fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[120fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• [LVF120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is displayed at [120fps].
• When the following functions are being used, [LVF Frame Rate] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– HDMI output
[Brightness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Red Tint]/[Blue Tint]
This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor/viewfinder.
1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust.
2 Press or to confirm the setting.
• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the
viewfinder is in use.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
587
[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]
[Eye Sensor]
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[AUTO]/[j3] to [i3]
Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
• Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the monitor, and the viewfinder
luminance when displaying the viewfinder.
• When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to positive side, the usage
period will shorten.
• When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] are not
available.
[Sensitivity] [HIGH]/[LOW]
This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic
viewfinder/monitor switching)/[LVF]
(viewfinder)/[MON] (monitor)
This will set the method for switching between the viewfinder and monitor.
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will also
switch.
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press or . The level gauge
will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
588
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT])
: Default settings
[Beep]
[Headphone Volume]
[Wi-Fi]
[Beep Volume] [ ] (High)/[ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High)/[ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/
[ ] (Pattern 3)
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ] (High)/[ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)
[E-Shutter Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/
[ ] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.
[0] to [LEVEL15] ([LEVEL3])
Adjusts the volume when headphones are connected.
(
Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 442)
• This functions in tandem with [Headphone Volume] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
[Wi-Fi Function] (15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth: 610)
[Wi-Fi Setup] ([Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 674)
[Streaming Setup] (16. Streaming Function: 676)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
589
[Bluetooth]
[USB]
[Bluetooth] (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 615)
[Send Image (Smartphone)] ([Smartphone]: 651)
[Remote Wakeup] ([Remote Wakeup]: 644)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]:
636
)
[Auto Transfer] ([Auto Transfer]: 639)
[Location Logging] ([Location Logging]: 642)
[Auto Clock Set] ([Auto Clock Set]: 645)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point. Wireless access points
used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered automatically.
[USB Mode]
[ ][Select on connection]/
[ ][PC(Storage)]/[ ][PC(Tether)]/
[ ][PictBridge(PTP)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is
connected.
[ ][Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB
communication system when connecting to another device.
[ ][PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
[ ][PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with
“LUMIX Tether”.
[ ][PictBridge(PTP)]: Select this setting when connecting to a printer that
supports PictBridge.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
590
[Battery Use Priority]
[HDMI Connection]
[USB Power Supply] [ON]/[OFF]
Provides power from the USB connection cable.
• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is
connected.
[BODY]/[BG]
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both the camera
and the Battery Grip.
[Output Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/
30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/60p] /
[4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] /
[1080p] / [1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device.
• The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.
• If no image appears on the external device with [AUTO], switch to a constant
setting other than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your external device.
(Refer to the operating instructions for the external device.)
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON]/[OFF]
Images with LUT (Look-Up Table) data applied are output when you play back
videos recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log L].
• This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [V-LogL View Assist] under the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (
[V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
591
[Power/Network Indicator]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO]/[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
• This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON]/[OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected to
a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable.
(
Using VIERA Link: 692)
[Background Color(Playback)] []/[]
Sets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of
images output on an external device or similar display.
• We recommend setting to [ ] to prevent burn-in on the screen of the output
destination.
[Photo Luminance Level] [0-255]/[16-255]
Sets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to external devices, etc.
[ON]/[OFF]
This will light up the status indicator and NETWORK connection lamp.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
592
[Setup] menu ([Setting])
[Save to Custom Mode]
[Load Custom Mode]
[Custom Mode Settings]
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]/[C4-1] to [C4-10]
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
(
Register in Custom Mode: 498)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]/[C4-1] to [C4-10]
Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and
overwrites the current settings with called up settings.
(
Calling Up Settings: 502)
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
[Edit Title]
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the ease of use of Custom mode.
(
Custom Mode Detailed Settings: 500)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
593
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Reset]
[Save]/[Load]/[Delete]/[Keep Settings While Format]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same
settings on multiple cameras.
(
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 505)
Returns the camera to its default settings.
(
[Reset]: 100)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
594
[Setup] menu ([Others])
[Clock Set]
[Time Zone]
Sets the date and time.
(
Clock Set: 70)
Sets the time zone.
1 Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or to confirm.
(A) Current time
(B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward
by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A)
(B)
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
595
[System Frequency]
[Pixel Refresh]
[Sensor Cleaning]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]/[50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back.
(
[System Frequency]: 336)
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
• The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is
purchased. Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get
recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the
image sensor is performed.
• You can use this function when the dust is particularly noticeable.
• Turn the camera off and on after cleaning.
14. Menu Guide – [Setup] Menu
596
[Language]
[Firmware Version]
[Online Manual]
[Approved Regulations]
This set the language displayed on the screen.
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set
the desired language.
[Firmware Update]/[Software info]
You can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens.
In addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera
software.
[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.
1 Download the firmware. (
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens: 19)
2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears
when you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the
camera.
3 Select [Firmware Update], press or , and then select [Yes] to update
the firmware.
[Software info]: Displays information about the camera software.
• When a supported optional item (XLR Microphone Adaptor, etc.) is attached to the
camera, you can also check its firmware version.
[URL display]/[QR Code display]
Displays the URL or QR code in order to browse the “Owner’s Manual <Complete
Guide>”.
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
597
[Playback] Menu
≥How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu: 597
≥[Playback] menu ([Playback Mode]): 599
≥[Playback] menu ([Process Image]): 602
≥[Playback] menu ([Add/Delete Info.]): 604
≥[Playback] menu ([Edit Image]): 605
≥[Playback] menu ([Others]): 608
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu
Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
•
Images are displayed separately by card slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ] and select the card slot.
• You can only select/edit images on one card at a time.
When [Single] has been selected
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press or .
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when or is pressed again.
6HW
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
598
When [Multi] has been selected
1 Press 3421 to select the image and then press or (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
When [Protect] is selected
1 Press 3421 to select the image, and then press or to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
2.
ュリヴヱハ
32
65
1
4
6HW&DQFHO
32
65
1
4
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
599
[Playback] menu ([Playback Mode])
: Default settings
[Playback Mode]
[Slide Show]
[Normal Play]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]/[Rating]/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Filters the type of images to play back.
• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[All]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]/[Rating]/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Selects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.
• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.
[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
Operations during slide show
3: Plays/pauses (You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ] or
[])
2: Move to the previous image
1: Move to the next image
4: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume (You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ]
or [ ])
• When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
600
[Rotate Disp.]
[Picture Sort]
[Magnify from AF Point]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
[ON]/[OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the
camera vertically.
[FILE NAME]/[DATE/TIME]
This sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.
[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
• If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all data, therefore pictures
may not be displayed in the set order.
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the point focused with AF.
Enlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.
[ON]/[OFF]
When playing back video recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log L], this displays
the images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder.
• This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] in [V-LogL View Assist]
in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]:
398
)
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
601
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
• This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom]
([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. (
[HLG View Assist]: 404)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
This displays the de-squeezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera. (
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 407)
• This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu.
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
602
[Playback] menu ([Process Image])
: Default settings
[RAW Processing]
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG
format.
(
[RAW Processing]: 460)
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 6K/4K burst file all at once.
(
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]: 206)
[AUTO]/[OFF]
When saving pictures, reduce the noise that occurs due to high ISO sensitivity.
(
Reducing Noise Caused by High Sensitivity ([6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]):
201
)
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
603
[Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot]. (
Time
Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 225
)
1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press or .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Time Lapse Video] is
not available.
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop Motion Animation].
(
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 225)
1 Press 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group and then press or
.
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Stop Motion Video] is
not available.
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
604
[Playback] menu ([Add/Delete Info.])
[Protect]
[Rating]
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
You can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted.
• For information about how to select images (
How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] menu: 597
)
• Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than
this camera.
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
If you set any of the five different rating levels for images, you can do the following:
• Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
• Play back or show a slide show of images by the rating level.
• Check the rating level in the file details display in operating systems such as
Windows 10, Windows 8.1, and Windows 8. (JPEG images only)
1 Select an image. (
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu: 597)
2 Press 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then press or .
• When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
• To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
605
[Playback] menu ([Edit Image])
: Default settings
[Resize]
[Single]/[Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to
enable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments.
• For information about how to select images (
How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] menu: 597
)
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
• The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
• [Resize] is not available for images recorded using the following functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– Group images
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– Pictures created from [C4K] video
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
607
[Copy]
[Copy Direction] []/[]
[Select Copy]/[Copy All in Folder]/[Copy All in Card]
You can copy the images in one of the cards to the other card.
• Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
[Select Copy]: Copies selected images.
1 Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2 Select the images. (
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu: 597)
[Copy All in Folder]: Copies all images in a folder.
1 Select the folder to copy.
2 Check the images to be copied and then press or to execute
copying.
[Copy All in Card]: Copies all images in the card.
Using the Fn button to copy images
If you press the Fn button with [Copy] assigned while playing back one image at a
time, the image currently being played back will be copied to the other card.
Select the copy destination folder from the following options. In the case of group
images, [Create a New Folder] is selected automatically.
[Same Folder Number as Source]: Copies to a folder with the same name as the
folder of the image to be copied.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number
and then copies the image to it.
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder to store the image and then copies the image to it.
• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy].
• The [Protect] setting is not copied.
• Copying may take a while.
• When using the following combinations of cards, videos, 6K/4K photos, and
images recorded with [Post-Focus] cannot be copied:
– Copying from an SDXC memory card to an SD memory card or SDHC memory
card
14. Menu Guide – [Playback] Menu
608
[Playback] menu ([Others])
: Default settings
[Delete Confirmation]
[Delete All Images]
["Yes" first]/["No" first]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation
screen for deleting an image is displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.
["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Deletes all images in a card.
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
• If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except those with a rating set are
deleted.
• [Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].
14. Menu Guide – Entering Characters
609
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1
Enter characters.
≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press or
until the character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this)
•
To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate or to the right to
move the entry position cursor.
• If you select an item and press or , you can perform the following
operations:
– [ ]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
–[] ]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
• When entering a password, (A) shows the number of characters you have
entered and the number of characters you can enter.
2
Complete entering.
≥Select [Set] and then press or .
(A)
610
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
≥Connecting to a Smartphone: 612
≥Operating the Camera with a Smartphone: 629
≥Sending Images from the Camera: 647
≥Wi-Fi Connections: 661
≥Send Settings and Selecting Images: 671
≥[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 674
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
Remote Operations from a Smartphone
You can use the “LUMIX Sync” smartphone app for remote recording and image
transfers.
(
Connecting to a Smartphone: 612)
Transferring Images from This Camera
You can transfer images to another device, such as a smartphone or PC, by operating
the camera.
(
Sending Images from the Camera: 647)
This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
611
Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions
NETWORK connection lamp
Light (blue) Monitor Operation
Lit
The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a
connection.
The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there is a
connection.
Blinking
When image data is sent using a camera
operation.
• Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while
sending images.
• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.
If the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing parts
may be sent.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
612
Connecting to a Smartphone
≥Flow of connecting a smartphone: 612
≥Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 614
≥Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 615
≥Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 622
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync”
(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
Flow of connecting a smartphone
1
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (Installing
“LUMIX Sync”: 614
)
2
Connect to a smartphone.
≥Using a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy
(Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 615)
≥Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth Low Energy
(Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 622)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
613
3
Operate the camera using the smartphone. (Operating
the Camera with a Smartphone: 629
)
≥[Remote shooting]: 631
≥[Shutter Remote Control]: 634
≥[Import images]: 637
≥[Auto Transfer]: 639
≥[Location Logging]: 642
≥[Remote Wakeup]: 644
≥[Auto Clock Set]: 645
≥[Camera settings copy]: 646
• You can also use the camera to transfer images to a smartphone.
(Sending Images from the Camera: 647)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
614
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the
search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 7 or higher
iOS: iOS 12 or higher
• Use the latest version.
• Supported OSs are current as of May 2021 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.
• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
615
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the Wi-Fi connection will be established
automatically by just operating “LUMIX Sync”.
•
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times
(
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 620)
• Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 7 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 12 or higher
• Turn on the smartphone’s Bluetooth function in advance.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
616
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
•
If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the displayed guide and select
[Next] until the screen to register the camera is
displayed.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
617
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET]
[Pairing]
≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A)
is displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
(A)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
618
5
When a message indicating that device registration is
complete, select [OK].
≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone
will be made.
• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
• During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
619
Wi-Fi connection with a Bluetooth connected smartphone
You can establish Wi-Fi connection by operating “LUMIX Sync”.
1 Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) or [ ] ([Import images]) in the “LUMIX
Sync” home screen.
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] Select [OFF]
•
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
620
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1 Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
•
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [ON]
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
3 Select [ ].
4 Select [Bluetooth Setup].
5 Turn Bluetooth ON.
6 From [Camera registered] items, select the camera’s device name.
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
621
Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
•
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET] [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
622
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])
Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible
without entering a password.
You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection
security.
1
Set the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
≥The SSID (A) of the camera is displayed on the screen.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi].
(
Fn Buttons: 471)
(A)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
623
2
In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi
function ON.
3
Select the SSID displayed on the camera.
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
5
(At the first connection) Confirm the device name
displayed on the camera and then select [Yes].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
624
Using Password Authentication to Connect
You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password
authentication through either QR code or manual input.
Scanning QR code to connect
1 Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Wi-Fi Password] [ON]
2 Display the QR code (A).
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
• Press or to enlarge the QR code.
• When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the
camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using either
QR code or manual password input to connect with password authentication.
(
Using Password Authentication to Connect: 624)
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
(A)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
625
3 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
4 Select [ ].
5 Select [Wi-Fi connection].
6 Select [QR code].
7 Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX Sync”.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
8 (At the first connection) Confirm the device name displayed on the screen of the
camera and then select [Yes].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
626
Manually entering a password to connect
1 Display the screen in Step 2 (
Scanning QR code to connect: 624).
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (B) displayed on the camera.
4 (At the first connection) Enter the password (B) displayed on the camera.
5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
6 (At the first connection) Confirm the device name displayed on the screen of the
camera and then select [Yes].
(B)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
627
Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings
When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
1 Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
2 Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network
1 Select [Via Network] and then press or .
• Connect the camera to a wireless access point. (
[Via Network]: 662)
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Connecting directly
1 Select [Direct] and then press or .
• Select [WPS Connection] to connect the camera to a smartphone. (
[Direct]:
666
)
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
628
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1
Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in
recording mode.
2
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]: 650)
3
On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
629
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
≥[Remote shooting]: 631
≥[Shutter Remote Control]: 634
≥[Import images]: 637
≥[Auto Transfer]: 639
≥[Location Logging]: 642
≥[Remote Wakeup]: 644
≥[Auto Clock Set]: 645
≥[Camera settings copy]: 646
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the ( ) symbol require
a Bluetooth connection by a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low
Energy.
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
630
Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
(A) : App settings
This allows connection settings, camera ON/OFF operations, and displays Help.
(B) : [Import images] (
[Import images]: 637)
(C) : [Remote shooting] (
[Remote shooting]: 631)
(D) : [Shutter Remote Control] (
[Shutter Remote Control]: 634)
(E) : [Others] (Camera settings copy/live streaming) (
[Camera settings copy]:
646
, 16. Streaming Function: 676)
(A)
(E)
(C)
(B)
(D)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
631
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (
Connecting to a Smartphone: 612)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
632
2
Start recording.
(A) Takes a picture
(B) Starts/ends the video recording
• The recorded image is saved on the camera.
• Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
(B)(A)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
633
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] Select [Priority of
Remote Device]
•
The default setting is [Camera].
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the
smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with
the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the
smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the
camera to turn on the screen, and select [End].
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
634
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (
Connecting to a Smartphone: 612)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home
screen.
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
635
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
• Set the camera to [M] mode. (
Manual Exposure Mode: 263)
• Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). (
[B] (Bulb): 266)
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
• During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
636
Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]
You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
• Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON].
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import
images] or [Remote shooting].
[Remote Shutter
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter
Remote Control].
• To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera, set
[Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] (
[Remote Wakeup]: 644)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] (
[Auto Transfer]: 639)
• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
637
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (
Connecting to a Smartphone: 612)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
• You can switch the card displayed by touching (A).
(A)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
638
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
•
If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of
the screen.
• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using
“LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video
recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality
may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
639
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] [ON]
•
If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate
the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or
[Join] (for iOS devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
640
3
Check the send settings on the camera and then press
or .
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (
Image Send Settings: 671)
• Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
4
Record with the camera.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
≥A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
641
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera
automatically connects to the smartphone via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when you turn
on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be transferred automatically:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
642
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
• Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Location Logging] [ON]
•
The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded images.
Bluetooth
GPS
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
643
• When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information
cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, and likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
GPS
GPS
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
644
[Remote Wakeup]
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
•
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Remote Wakeup] [ON]
3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Turning On the Camera
1 Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
Turning Off the Camera
1 Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Select [Turn off the camera].
3 Select [Power OFF].
• When you turn on the camera with the smartphone, the status indicator will flash.
• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work
even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
645
[Auto Clock Set]
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
1
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto Clock Set] [ON]
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
646
[Camera settings copy]
This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
1
Select [ ] ([Others]) [ ] ([Camera settings copy])
in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2
Save or load settings information.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate the “LUMIX Sync”.
• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
• When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically
created.
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
• You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as those
in [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. (
List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 771
)
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
647
Sending Images from the Camera
≥[Smartphone]: 651
≥[PC]: 655
≥[Printer]: 659
Operate the camera to send recorded images to a device connected by
Wi-Fi.
Operation flow
1
Select the sending method.
Select the sending method from the [Send Images While Recording] and
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] camera menus.
2
Select the destination (type of the destination device).
• [Smartphone] (
[Smartphone]: 651)
• [PC] (
[PC]: 655)
• [Printer] (
[Printer]: 659)
3
Select the connection method and then connect by
Wi-Fi.
• [Via Network] (
[Via Network]: 662)
• [Direct] (
[Direct]: 666)
4
Check the send settings.
Change the send settings as necessary.
• Image send settings (
Image Send Settings: 671)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
648
5
([Send Images While Recording]) Take pictures.
This automatically sends the recorded pictures as they are taken.
([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) Select an image.
Send the selected images.
• Selecting images (
Selecting Images: 673)
Refer to the following pages for the steps common to all devices.
•
Wi-Fi connections: [Via Network] (
[Via Network]: 662)/[Direct] ([Direct]: 666)
• Image send settings (
Image Send Settings: 671)
• Selecting images (
Selecting Images: 673)
• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
649
Images That Can be Sent
Images that can be sent differ depending on the destination device.
• Depending on the smartphone or the OS version, these may not be displayed
correctly.
• It is not possible to send images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB to [Smartphone].
Destination device
Images that can be sent
[Send Images While
Recording]
[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
[Smartphone]
(
[Smartphone]: 651)
JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4
[PC] (
[PC]: 655) JPEG/RAW
JPEG/RAW/
MP4/MOV/
6K/4K burst files/
Post-Focus images
[Printer] (
[Printer]:
659
)
— JPEG
• Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
650
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi.
(
Fn Buttons: 471)
•
Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
[Terminate the
Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to
select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for
Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for
sending recorded images. (
Image Send Settings:
671
)
[Register the Current
Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or
method so that you can easily connect with the same
connection settings next time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the
camera. (
[Network Address]: 675)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
651
[Smartphone]
Transfer recorded images to a smartphone connected using Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (
Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 614)
1
Select the method for sending the images on the
camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Send Images While Recording]/[Send Images
Stored in the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Smartphone].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
652
3
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 662) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
666
), and then connect.
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
5
Select the destination smartphone on the camera.
6
Check the send settings and then press or .
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (
Image Send
Settings: 671
)
7
(When [Send Images While Recording] is selected) Take
pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected)
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
653
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with
Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing the [Q] button during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)]. (
Fn Buttons: 471)
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (
Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 614)
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
• Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (
Image Send Settings:
671
)
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
654
Send multiple images
1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (
Image Send Settings:
671
)
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
or : Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Using the menu to transfer easily
[ ] [ ] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
•
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press or to
execute.
• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “
Send multiple images”.
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
655
[PC]
Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
• Turn on the PC.
• Create a destination folder for images.
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. (
[PC
Connection]: 674
)
Create a Destination Folder for Images
When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
1 Select the destination folder and then right-click.
2 Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
When using Mac (Example for macOS 10.14)
1 Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following order.
[File]
[Get Info]
2 Enable folder sharing.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10
Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.2
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
656
1
Select the method for sending images on the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Send Images While Recording]/[Send Images
Stored in the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [PC].
• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes
non-alphanumeric characters.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or
less alphanumeric characters.
• Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed
setting procedures.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
657
3
Connect the camera and PC by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 662) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
666
), and then connect.
4
Enter the computer name of the PC name you want to
connect to (for Mac, the NetBIOS name).
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
5
Select a folder for storing images.
• Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images
will be saved there.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
658
6
Check the send settings and then press or .
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (
Image Send Settings: 671)
7
(When [Send Images While Recording] is selected) Take
pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected)
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you
set on your PC.
• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the
PC may not be possible.
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
659
[Printer]
You can send images to a PictBridge (wireless LAN)
*1
-supported printer
connected by Wi-Fi for printing.
*1 DPS over IP standard-compliant
1
Select the method for sending images on the camera.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Printer].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera
660
3
Connect the camera to a printer by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 662) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
666
), and then connect.
4
Select the destination printer.
5
Select and print images.
• The procedure for selecting images is the same as the one for when the USB
connection cable is connected. (
Printing: 702)
• To terminate the connection, press [ ].
• For details about PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers, contact their
manufacturers.
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
661
Wi-Fi Connections
≥[Via Network]: 662
≥[Direct]: 666
≥Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 668
When [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of
the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from either [Via
Network] or [Direct] to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from History] or
[Select a destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected
device with the previously-used settings.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
662
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and an external device through the wireless access
point.
1
Select the method for connecting to a wireless access
point.
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List]
• After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
• Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
663
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1 Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS mode.
Example)
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access
point.
3 Press or of the camera.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
664
[From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to it.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
• Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again.
• If no wireless access point is found (
Connecting by Manual Input: 665)
2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
665
Connecting by Manual Input
1 In the screen in Step 1 of “
[From List]”, select [Manual Input].
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then
select [Set].
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
3 Select the network authentication.
[WPA2-PSK]/[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[No Encryption]
4 (When other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key and then
select [Set].
• Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
666
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the external device.
1
Select the method for connecting with the destination
device.
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the external device to
connect.
• On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
667
[Manual Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the device.
• If the destination is set to [Smartphone], the password is not displayed. Select
the SSID to establish a connection. (
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi
connection]): 622
)
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
668
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a
destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to connect to.
• Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
669
Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from History]
2 Select the History item to register and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated
as two characters.
Editing Items Registered in Favorite
1 Display items registered to Favorite.
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from Favorite]
2 Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.
[Remove from Favorite]
[Change the Order in Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order.
[Change the Registered Name]
Enter characters to change the registered name.
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
670
• The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register
frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless
access point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the
camera using [Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi
connection]): 622
)
• It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are connected.
In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
671
Send Settings and Selecting Images
≥Image Send Settings: 671
≥Selecting Images: 673
Image Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation
screen will be displayed, so press [DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
672
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Change] ([M], [S], or [VGA])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
• This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending of RAW
images from this camera. (
Images That Can be Sent: 649)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
673
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera], select the images
using the following procedure.
1
Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
2
Select the image.
[Single Select] setting
1 Press 21 to select an image.
2 Press or .
[Multi Select] setting
1 Press 3421 to select an image and then press or . (Repeat this)
• To cancel the setting, press or again.
• Images are displayed separately by card slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ].
• Selecting images at once is possible only for the images in a single card.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
6HW
2.
ュリヴヱハ
32
65
1
4
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
674
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
1
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]
This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to
be used during remote recording. (
Operation Method During Remote
Recording: 633
)
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can use a password to connect for enhanced security. (
Using Password
Authentication to Connect: 624
)
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the same workgroup as the
destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
• To change the workgroup name, press or and enter the new
workgroup name.
How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
675
[Device Name]
You can change the name (SSID) of the camera.
• To change the SSID name, press [DISP.] and enter the new SSID name.
How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and
to protect personal information in the camera and included with images, protect
the Wi-Fi function with a password.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• How to enter characters (
Entering Characters: 609)
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the
Wi-Fi function.
• If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting])
menu to reset the network settings and thereby reset the password.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera.
676
16. Streaming Function
≥Stream by Operating a Smartphone: 677
≥Stream by Operating the Camera: 679
≥Streaming Settings: 682
Live stream the camera’s images and audio over the internet.
• To start streaming, there is a smartphone operation method and camera
operation method.
• This camera supports RTMP/RTMPS
*1
.
You can stream to video sharing websites that support RTMP or RTMPS.
*1 Communication protocol for streaming
16. Streaming Function – Stream by Operating a Smartphone
677
Stream by Operating a Smartphone
Operate the smartphone app “LUMIX Sync” to start streaming.
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (
Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 614)
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (
Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 615
)
(Camera operation)
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
(Smartphone operation)
2
Set streaming with “LUMIX Sync”.
1 Start up “LUMIX Sync”.
2 Select [Others]
[Live streaming] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
3 Select a video sharing website and login.
• When inputting a streaming destination address manually, select
[Stream with RTMP/RTMPS].
Bluetooth
16. Streaming Function – Stream by Operating a Smartphone
678
4 Set streaming details.
[Wi-Fi Connection Setting]: Sets the wireless access point the camera
connects to when streaming.
[Streaming Quality]: Sets the image quality that will be streamed.
[Privacy settings]: Selects privacy setting.
5 Select [Set to the camera].
• If the message [Unable to confirm security of the streaming address.
Continue?] is displayed, check that the URL of the streaming destination
is correct before continuing the connecting operation.
• The settings will be sent from the smartphone to the camera.
• The [Streaming Setup] of the camera turns [ON], and the camera
connects via Wi-Fi to the access point.
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
3
Start streaming.
≥Select [Start streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”.
≥[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
4
Stop streaming.
≥Select [Stop streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”.
5
End the streaming function.
≥If you select [End streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”, the [Streaming
Setup] of the camera will be set to [OFF].
16. Streaming Function – Stream by Operating the Camera
679
Stream by Operating the Camera
Sets the streaming destination on a PC and saves it to a card. Insert the card to the
camera and start streaming by operating the camera.
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Network Setting Software” to the PC.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10
Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.2
• Insert a card into the PC.
(PC operation)
1
Set the streaming destination on the “LUMIX Network
Setting Software”.
1 Start up “LUMIX Network Setting Software”.
2 Login to a video sharing website and retrieve a streaming destination
(URL, stream key).
SD
16. Streaming Function – Stream by Operating the Camera
680
3 Input the streaming destination (URL, stream key) to “LUMIX Network
Setting Software” and select [Next].
4 Set the output destination (card) and file name, and select [Save].
• Characters that can be set in [File Name]: Alphabet (uppercase),
numbers, up to 8 characters.
• To prevent usage from a third party, you can secure the streaming
destination with a password.
– Put a check mark in [Password].
– When you set a password, password input will be required when
loading the streaming destination.
– You can enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• The settings set at step 3 is saved in the card.
(Camera operation)
2
Insert a card to the camera.
3
Set up streaming settings on the camera.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Load the streaming destination to the camera.
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Streaming Setup] [Save/Load
Streaming Address]
[Load]
• If a password is set at step 1, input the password.
3 Set the streaming quality and wireless access point to connect to.
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Streaming Setup] [Streaming
Quality]/[Wi-Fi Connection Setting] (
Streaming Settings: 682)
4 Set [Streaming Function] to [ON].
•
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Streaming Setup] [Streaming
Function]
[ON]
• If the message [Unable to confirm security of the streaming address.
Continue?] is displayed, check that the URL of the streaming destination
is correct before continuing the connecting operation.
• The camera connects to the access point via Wi-Fi.
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
16. Streaming Function – Stream by Operating the Camera
681
4
Start streaming.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.
≥[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
≥Operations to start streaming may be needed on the video sharing
website.
5
Stop streaming.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.
6
End the streaming function.
≥ [ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Streaming Setup] [Streaming
Function]
[OFF]
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
682
Streaming Settings
≥Notes When Using the Streaming Function: 686
Configures streaming settings.
[ ] [ ] [Wi-Fi] Select [Streaming Setup]
[Streaming
Function]
[ON]: Performs Wi-Fi connection and gets into a state where
streaming can start.
[OFF]: Ends the Wi-Fi connection for performing streaming.
[Streaming
Quality]
Sets the image quality that will be streamed. ([Streaming
Quality]: 685
)
[Streaming
Address]
Displays the current streaming destination address.
To change the streaming destination, press [DISP.] first then
input the streaming destination address.
• For information on how to enter characters (
Entering
Characters: 609
)
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
683
[Save/Load
Streaming
Address]
[Save]
Saves the current streaming destination
address to the card.
• If saving new data, then select [New File],
and if overwriting an existing file, select
that existing file.
• When [New File] is selected, a screen to
select the file name to save as is
displayed.
[OK]: Saves using the file name on the
screen.
[Change the file name]: Changes the file
name and saves the file.
• Available characters: alphabetic
characters (uppercase), numerals, up to 8
characters
• For information on how to enter characters
(
Entering Characters: 609)
[Load]
Copy the streaming destination address in
the card to the camera.
• If you set a password when you saved the
streaming destination address on the
card, the password entry screen is
displayed.
[Delete]
Deletes the streaming destination address
within the card.
[Keep Settings
While Format]
When formatting the card, you can keep the
streaming destination address saved in the
card and format.
[Password]
Displays the password input screen when
[Save] is selected.
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
684
[Wi-Fi
Connection
Setting]
Sets the wireless access point the camera connects to when
streaming. (
[Via Network]: 662)
• Up to 10 streaming destination addresses can be saved onto one card.
• Set [Wi-Fi Connection Setting] before setting [Streaming Function] to [ON].
• If you forget the password, save the streaming destination address again with a
new password.
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
685
[Streaming Quality]
Video compression format: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Streaming Quality] Resolution Frame rate Bit rate
FHD/16M/60p
1920k1080
59.94p 16 Mbps
FHD/8M/60p 59.94p 8 Mbps
FHD/6M/30p 29.97p 6 Mbps
FHD/3M/30p 29.97p 3 Mbps
HD/6M/60p
1280k720
59.94p 6 Mbps
HD/4M/30p 29.97p 4 Mbps
[Streaming Quality] Resolution Frame rate Bit rate
FHD/16M/50p
1920k1080
50.00p 16 Mbps
FHD/8M/50p 50.00p 8 Mbps
FHD/6M/25p 25.00p 6 Mbps
FHD/3M/25p 25.00p 3 Mbps
HD/6M/50p
1280k720
50.00p 6 Mbps
HD/4M/25p 25.00p 4 Mbps
• If the streaming destination is an RTMPS, an image quality with a bit rate of 16
Mbps or above cannot be set.
• The image output via HDMI is output with the resolution and frame rate according
to the combinations of the [Streaming Quality] and [Down Convert] settings.
– When [Streaming Quality] is set to [HD], the output is in [FHD] resolution.
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
686
Notes When Using the Streaming Function
Operation is as follows when using the streaming function:
• The following functions are not available:
– [Hybrid Log Gamma] ([Photo Style])
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Rec Quality]
– [Rec Quality (My List)]
– [Variable Frame Rate]
– [96kHz/24bit], [48kHz/24bit] ([XLR Mic Adaptor Setting])
– [Loop Recording (video)]
– [Segmented File Recording]
– [Live Cropping]
– [Wi-Fi Function] (Wi-Fi connection destination during streaming can be set in
[Streaming Setup].)
– Pairing function of [Bluetooth]
• The streaming function is not available when using the following functions:
– When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
– During USB connection (Excludes when supplying power using a USB connection
cable)
16. Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
687
• Displays a blue frame on the screen during streaming:
[]
[ ] [Streaming Blue Frame Indicator] ([Streaming Blue Frame
Indicator]: 578
)
• When you press the video rec. button, the images being streamed will be
recorded on the external recorder output via HDMI:
[]
[ ] [HDMI Rec Output] [HDMI Recording Control]
• If you turn the camera off without ending the streaming function, when the next
time the camera is turned on, it is automatically reconnected to the connection
destination that was previously connected.
• Video cannot be recorded to the cards while using streaming function.
• The menu screen cannot be displayed while streaming.
• The camera’s recording information will not be displayed on the streamed
images.
• The required conditions for streaming differ depending on the video sharing
website. Check the video sharing website for details.
688
17. Connecting to Other Devices
≥Viewing on a TV: 690
≥Importing Images to a PC: 694
≥Storing on a Recorder: 698
≥Tethered Recording: 699
≥Printing: 702
This chapter describes connections with other devices, such as TVs and
PCs.
Connect using either the [HDMI] socket or the USB port on the camera.
Refer to the sections below for more details about connections.
[HDMI] socket
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially available
HDMI cable.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
17. Connecting to Other Devices
689
USB port
Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC,
recorder, or printer.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
690
Viewing on a TV
You can connect the camera to an external monitor or TV to view recorded
pictures and videos.
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially
available HDMI cable. (
[HDMI] socket: 688)
2
Turn on the TV.
3
Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4
Turn on the camera.
5
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
≥The recorded images are displayed on the TV. (The monitor and
viewfinder of the camera will turn off.)
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
691
• With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)].
(
[HDMI Connection]: 590)
• Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI
Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (
[HDMI Connection]: 590)
• HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the same
time while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] or [PictBridge(PTP)].
• If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
• Depending on the connected TV, 6K/4K burst files may not be played back
correctly.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
692
Using VIERA Link
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
1 Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link using a
commercially available HDMI cable. (
[HDMI] socket: 688)
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Turn on the VIERA Link.
•
[ ] [ ] [HDMI Connection] [VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON]
4 Display the playback screen.
• Press [ ].
5 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link
If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching
If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
• To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
693
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function
using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies
are not guaranteed.
• The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with
Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
• Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
694
Importing Images to a PC
≥Installing Software: 696
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging
files and folders on this camera to the PC.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (
USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
≥Windows: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
≥Mac: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
• The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which
can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10
Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.2
• You can use software to perform operations such as organizing and correcting
recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos. (
Installing
Software: 696
)
• Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”.
For details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
695
Folder Structure Inside Card
(A) The camera’s setup information
(B) Streaming Settings
(C) Images
(D) Folder number
(E) JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
MP4: MP4 videos, 6K/4K burst files
MOV: MOV videos
(F) File number
(G) Color space
P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. (
[USB]: 589)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
LUMIX
STREAM
(B)
AD_LUMIX
DCIM
(C)
100XXXXX
PXXX0001.MP4
(D)
(F)
(G)
(E)
CAMSET
(A)
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
696
Installing Software
Install the software to perform operations such as organizing and
correcting recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos.
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 8.1 (64-bit recommended)
Mac: macOS 10.13 to macOS 10.15, macOS 11
• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
• Supported OSs are current as of May 2021 and are subject to change.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
697
30-Day Full Trial Version of “LoiLoScope”
This software allows you to easily edit videos.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://loilo.tv/product/20
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8
• You can download a trial version that can be used for free for 30 days.
• For more information on how to use “LoiLoScope”, refer to the “LoiLoScope”
manual available for download at the site.
• “LoiLoScope” is not available for Mac.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder
698
Storing on a Recorder
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and recorder.
• Insert a card into card slot 1.
1
Connect the camera and recorder with the USB
connection cable. (
USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
3
Operate the recorder to store the images.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. (
[USB]: 589)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
• Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
• For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions for
the recorder.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
699
Tethered Recording
≥Installing Software: 700
≥Operating the Camera from a PC: 701
If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you
can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera
from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen
(tethered recording).
In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during
tethered recording.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
700
Installing Software
“LUMIX Tether”
This software is for controlling the camera from a PC.
It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then
save the images to the PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit)
Mac: macOS 10.13, 10.14, 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.2
≥ Interface
USB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1))
• Supported OSs are current as of May 2021 and are subject to change.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
• For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX Tether”.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
701
Operating the Camera from a PC
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and PC.
• Install “LUMIX Tether” on PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (
USB port: 689)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press or
.
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s screen.
3
Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. (
[USB Mode]: 589)
• The Wi-Fi/Bluetooth functions are not available while there is a PC connection
with [PC(Tether)].
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Printing
702
Printing
If you connect the camera to a printer that supports PictBridge, you can
select pictures on the camera’s monitor and then print them.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and printer.
• Set the print quality and other settings on the printer.
1
Play back the card that contains the picture you want to
print.
≥Press [ ].
≥After pressing [ ], press 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or [Card
Slot 2], and then press or .
•
The card for printing cannot be changed after connecting to the printer.
2
Connect the camera and printer with the USB
connection cable. (
USB port: 689)
3
Press 34 to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and then press
or .
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Printing
703
4
Press 21 to select a picture and then press or .
≥To print multiple pictures, press 3, set the picture selection
method, and then select pictures.
[Multi Select]
Selects the picture to print.
1 Press 3421 to select a picture and then press or .
• To cancel the setting, press or again.
2 Press [DISP.] to end selection.
[Select All]
Prints all the stored pictures.
[Rating]
Prints all pictures with [Rating] levels from [¿1] to [¿5].
5
Set the print settings.
PictBridge
PictBridge
0XOWL3ULQW
3ULQW
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Printing
704
6
Start printing.
≥Select [Print start] and then press or .
Setting Items (Print Settings)
[Print start] Starts printing.
[Print with Date]
Sets printing with date.
• If the printer does not support printing with date, the
date cannot be printed.
[Num.of prints] Sets the number of prints to be printed (up to 999).
[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.
[Page Layout]
Sets whether to add borders and how many images to
be printed on each sheet of paper.
17. Connecting to Other Devices – Printing
705
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the
camera will be automatically connected to the printer without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (
[USB]: 589)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while printing is in progress.
• When connecting with the printer is not possible, set [USB Power Supply] to
[OFF] and then try connecting again. (
[USB]: 589)
• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [ ] (Cable disconnect
prohibit icon) is displayed.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
• To print images with paper size and layout settings not supported by the camera,
set the [Paper Size] and [Page Layout] to [ ] and then select the desired
settings on the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for your printer.)
• If a yellow [¥] is displayed, the camera is receiving an error message from the
printer. Check that there is no problem with the printer.
• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed in batches. In this
case, the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.
• RAW images cannot be printed.
• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be printed:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
706
18. Materials
≥Digital Camera Accessory System: 707
≥Using Optional Accessories: 709
≥Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 714
≥Message Displays: 733
≥Troubleshooting: 736
≥Cautions for Use: 750
≥Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time
with the Battery: 762
≥Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time
with Cards: 766
≥List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying:
771
≥List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 790
≥Specifications: 797
≥Trademarks and Licences: 809
18. Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
707
Digital Camera Accessory System
(Product numbers correct as of May 2021.)
*1 Supplied with an AC adaptor, an AC cable and a USB connection cable. (Charging
time: approx. 175 min)
*2 The AC Adaptor (optional) can only be used with the designated Panasonic DC
Coupler (optional).
The AC Adaptor (optional) cannot be used by itself.
*3 Use if the attached lens is in contact with the tripod pedestal.
Product name Model number
Battery pack DMW-BLK22
Battery charger
*1
DMW-BTC15
AC Adaptor
*2
DMW-AC10
DC Coupler
*2
DMW-DCC17
Battery Grip DMW-BGGH5
Flash
DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,
DMW-FL200L
LED Video Light VW-LED1
Stereo Shotgun Microphone DMW-MS2
Stereo Microphone VW-VMS10
XLR Microphone Adaptor DMW-XLR1
Body Cap DMW-BDC1
Shutter Remote Control DMW-RS2
Tripod Grip DMW-SHGR1
Mount Adaptor DMW-MA2M
Tripod adaptor
*3
DMW-TA1
Shoulder Strap DMW-SSTG9
18. Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
708
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
• For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to
our catalogs/web pages, etc.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/web pages,
etc.
• (For U.S.A. only)
To order optional accessories please visit
http://shop.panasonic.com
or your local Photo Specialty Dealer.
18. Materials – Using Optional Accessories
709
Using Optional Accessories
≥Battery Grip (Optional): 709
≥Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 711
≥Tripod Grip (Optional): 712
≥AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 713
•
For information on the external flash (
Using an External Flash (Optional): 304)
• For information on the external microphone (
External Microphones (Optional):
436
)
• For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor (
XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 439
)
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
Battery Grip (Optional)
When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BGGH5: optional)
improves ease of operation and grip when the camera is held vertically.
Also, inserting a battery (DMW-BLK22) into the Battery Grip provides a
stable supply of power even for long periods of recording.
18. Materials – Using Optional Accessories
710
Selecting Battery Usage Priority
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both
the camera and the Battery Grip.
Getting started:
• Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the battery grip connector.
1 Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Set the battery use priority.
•
[ ] [ ] [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]
The battery in the camera is used first.
[BG]
The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.
• When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the
monitor.
• You can register functions of your choice to the [Fn] button on the Battery Grip.
(
Fn Buttons: 471)
The [WB] button, [ISO] button, [ ] button and joystick each work the same as
the buttons and joystick on the camera body.
• The [AF/AE LOCK] button on the Battery Grip works the same as the [AF ON]
button on the camera body.
• You can also use DMW-BLF19 (optional), but since it has a smaller battery
capacity than DMW-BLK22, it is recommended to use DMW-BLK22.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the Battery Grip for details.
18. Materials – Using Optional Accessories
711
Shutter Remote Control (Optional)
You can connect the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to use
the camera as follows:
• Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake
• Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst recording
• Start/end the video recording
• Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of the Shutter Remote Control
Registering Functions to the Video Rec. Button
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter
Remote Control.
The functions that can be registered are the same as the functions that can
be registered to the Fn buttons for recording. (
Setting Items ([Fn Button
Set]/[Setting in REC mode]): 477)
[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
[ ] [ ] Select [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
•
Register functions using the same operations as [Fn Button Set]. (
Fn Buttons:
471
)
18. Materials – Using Optional Accessories
712
Tripod Grip (Optional)
Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for
recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.
•
Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
• Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).
• The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip.
• Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
18. Materials – Using Optional Accessories
713
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)
With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without
worrying about the remaining battery charge.
•
Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.
They cannot be used independently of one another.
• When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so the
structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.
After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler cover,
then firmly close the cover.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
714
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
≥Recording Screen: 714
≥Playback Screen: 728
•
The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to
[].
Recording Screen
(1)
Flash mode ([Flash Mode]: 309)
Flash synchro ([Flash Synchro]: 315)
Wireless mode (
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
AWBc AWBw
White balance (White Balance (WB): 278)
TC 00:00:00.00TC 00:00:00.00TC 00:00:00.00
999
ISO200
F
3.5
60
+
1
/
3
999
ISO200
F
3.5
60
+
1
/
3
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(6)
1
1
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
715
White Balance Bracket
White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)
(
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 238)
Adjusting the white balance (Adjusting the White Balance:
283
)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 285)
Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 293)
Filter effect adjustment (
Adjusting the Filter Effect: 295)
LUT View Assist ([V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 404)
Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 116)
Picture size (
[Picture Size]: 115)
Extended Tele Conversion (Extended Tele Conversion: 176)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 337)
Recording quality (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Recording frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 338)
Variable frame rate (
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
Electronic shutter ([Shutter Type]: 240)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 125, Record Using
MF: 167
)
Focus Bracket ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 237)
AFL AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
EXPS
AFS
AFC
MF
AFS
BKT
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
716
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 524)
FULL Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 348)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
Connected to Wi-Fi (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth functions: 611
)
Connected to Bluetooth (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth functions: 611
)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 642)
Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 243)
Camera shake alert
ヤヒ
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
717
(2)
(3)
PRE
Pre-Burst recording ([Pre-Burst Recording] ([6K/4K Burst]/
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]): 195
)
Multiple exposures ([Multiple Exposure]: 531)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 239)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 348)
Anamorphic Desqueeze Display ([Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]: 407
)
Overlay indication ([Sheer Overlay]: 572)
LUT View Assist ([V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
Loop recording ([Loop Recording (video)]: 412)
Streaming function is ON (16. Streaming Function: 676)
Currently streaming (16. Streaming Function: 676)
Time code (Time Code: 350)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 365)
Built-in microphone, External microphone (Audio Settings:
364
, External Microphones (Optional): 436)
XLR microphone adaptor setting (
XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 439
)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364)
Exposure meter (
[Expo.Meter]: 571)
48kHz/16bit
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
718
(4)
(5)
Histogram ([Histogram]: 566)
AF area
Spot metering target ([Metering Mode]: 252)
Center marker ([Center Marker]: 576)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 227)
Operation lock ([Operation Lock Setup]: 560)
XXmXXs
Elapsed recording time (Screen Displays While Video
Recording: 326
)
Time stamp recording ([Time Stamp Rec.]: 547)
¥
Focus (turns green) (Recording: 77)
Recording state (turns red) (
Screen Displays While Video
Recording: 326
)
Focus (in low light AF situations) (Low illumination AF: 129)
Focus (Starlight AF) (Starlight AF: 129)
Flash adjustment ([Flash Adjust.]: 313)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 79)
Program Shift (Program Shift: 255)
2021.12. 1
10:00:00
LOW
STAR
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
719
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 252)
AE Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271)
60 Shutter speed
F3.5 Aperture value
Aperture Bracket ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 236)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
269
)
Exposure Bracket (
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 235)
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 266)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 273)
Card access indication (turns red) (Screen Displays While
Video Recording: 326
)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
Double card slot function (
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118)
No card
Card full
999
Number of still images that can be taken (Number of Still
Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with
Cards: 766
)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 187
)
XXmXXs
Video recording time (Number of Still Images That Can Be
Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 766
)
Battery indication/Power supply (Power Indications: 55)
Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 709)
A
E
L
F3.5
BKT
BKT
+
1
/
3
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
720
(6)
Temperature rise warning icon (Recording: 737)
Image being sent ([Auto Transfer]: 639)
Touch Tab ([Touch Settings]: 559)
Fn button (Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons): 486)
Touch Zoom (Touch operation: 178)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter (Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 108)
Exposure compensation (Exposure Compensation: 269)
Touch AE (Touch AE: 111)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 524)
(Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 297)/
(
Operations During Video Recording: 333)
Type of defocus ([Miniature Effect]) (Setting the Type of
Defocus ([Miniature Effect]): 299
)
One Point Color (Setting the Color to Be Left ([One Point
Color]): 300
)
Light source position ([Sunshine]) (Setting the Light Source
Position and Size ([Sunshine]): 301
)
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 295)
Filter on/off (Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 297)
Fn3
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
721
MINI Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 293)
Touch Zoom (Operations During Video Recording: 333)
F Aperture value (Operations During Video Recording: 333)
SS Shutter speed (Operations During Video Recording: 333)
Exposure compensation (Operations During Video Recording:
333
)
ISO ISO sensitivity (Operations During Video Recording: 333)
Sound recording level adjustment (Operations During Video
Recording: 333
)
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
722
Control Panel
(1)
(2)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 79)
1/60 Shutter speed (Recording: 77)
F3.5 Aperture value (Recording: 77)
Battery indication/Power supply (Power Indications: 55)
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 55)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 273)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
269
)
Manual Exposure Assist (
Manual Exposure Assist: 266)
Flash setting ([Flash Adjust.]: 313, [Flash Synchro]: 315,
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 317)
Flash mode (
[Flash Mode]: 309)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
ISO
200
0
0
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
723
(3)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 125, Record Using
MF: 167
)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 135)
FINE
Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 116)
Image area of video (
[Image Area of Video]: 348)
Recording file format (
[Rec. File Format]: 337)
Recording quality (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
Aspect ratio ([Aspect Ratio]: 114)
Picture size (
[Picture Size]: 115)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 611
)
Fn button settings (Fn Buttons: 471)
AFS
Fn
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
724
(4)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 285)
AWB White balance (White Balance (WB): 278)
i.Dynamic Range ([i.Dynamic Range]: 520)
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 252)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
Double card slot function (
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118)
No card
Card full
999
Number of still images that can be taken (Number of Still
Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with
Cards: 766
)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 187
)
RXXmXXs
Video recording time (Number of Still Images That Can Be
Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 766
)
---- No card
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
725
Control Panel (Creative Video mode)
(1)
(2)
Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 338)
Variable frame rate (
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure mode (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos:
331
)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
269
)
Manual Exposure Assist (
Manual Exposure Assist: 266)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 348)
Time code (Time Code: 350)
Recording state (Screen Displays While Video Recording:
326
)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
FPS
60
SHUTTER
1/60
IRIS
F3.5
00:00:00.00
TC
DF
REC
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
726
(3)
(4)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 337)
Recording quality (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
Double card slot function (
[Double Card Slot Function]: 118)
Video recording time (Number of Still Images That Can Be
Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 766
)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 611
)
Streaming function is ON (16. Streaming Function: 676)
Currently streaming (16. Streaming Function: 676)
Battery indication/Power supply (Power Indications: 55)
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 55)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 365)
Built-in microphone, External microphone (Audio Settings:
364
, External Microphones (Optional): 436)
XLR microphone adaptor setting (XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 439
)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 364)
FHD 59.94
p
420/8-L
MOV
24
m
59
s
48kHz/16bit
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
728
Playback Screen
(1)
Playback mode ([Playback Mode]: 599)
Recording date and time (Clock Set: 70)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
¿3 Rating ([Rating]: 604)
Video playback (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Protected picture ([Protect]: 604)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 642)
Obtaining information
Cable disconnect prohibit icon
Marker available (Picture Selection Slide View Screen
Operations: 202
, 6K/4K Burst Playback Screen Operations: 204)
Reduce Rolling Shutter (Correcting Distortion in Pictures
([Reduce Rolling Shutter]): 200
)
2021.12.12021.12.12021.12.1 10:0010:0010:00
100-0001100-0001100-0001 1/9991/9991/999
8m30s8m30s8m30s
33
ISO200
F
3.5
60
±
0
ISO200
F
3.5
60
±
0
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)
2021.12. 1 10:00
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
729
(2)
Saving pictures from a 6K/4K burst file (Selecting Pictures
from a 6K/4K Burst File: 197
)
Saving pictures from a Post-Focus image (Selecting the
Focus Point for the Picture to Save: 211
)
100-0001 Folder/file number (Folder Structure Inside Card: 695)
1/999 Image number/Total number of images
Number of group images
Number of files
(
Group Images: 456)
XXmXXs Video recording time (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Variable frame rate ([Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
Loop recording ([Loop Recording (video)]: 412)
LUT View Assist ([V-LogL View Assist]: 398)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 404)
SLF
ILOHV
XX
s
XX
m
XX
s
XX
m
XX
s
MON
MODE2
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
730
(3)
(4)
(5)
Playback (video) (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Group images (Group Images: 456)
Time code (Time Code: 350)
XLR microphone adaptor setting (XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 439
)
MP4
FHD
420/8-L
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 337)
Recording quality (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Recording frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 338)
Variable frame rate (
[Variable Frame Rate]: 382)
FULL Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 348)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 611
)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 239)
Recording information
Battery indication/Power supply (Power Indications: 55)
Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 709)
48kHz/16bit
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
731
Detailed information display
(1) Card slot (
Inserting Cards (Optional): 59)
(2) Recording date and time (
Clock Set: 70)
(3) Folder/file number (
Folder Structure Inside Card: 695)
(4) Recording information (basic)
(5) Recording information (advanced)
Detailed information display
Histogram display
(3)(2)(1) (5)(4)
18. Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
732
Photo Style display
White balance display
Lens information display
18. Materials – Message Displays
733
Message Displays
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
Card
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
•
It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting.
(
Formatting Cards (Initialization): 62)
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
•
Use a card compatible with the camera. (
Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25)
[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]
•
Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
• Insert a different card.
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
•
Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
18. Materials – Message Displays
734
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing
speed of the card]
•
The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.
Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (
Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25)
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting. (
Formatting Cards
(Initialization): 62
)
Lens
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button
while lens is attached.]
•
Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (
Attaching a Lens: 63)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached
correctly.]
• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and
the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
18. Materials – Message Displays
735
Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
•
Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact
the dealer.
• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
Others
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be
deleted]
•
Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (
Formatting Cards
(Initialization): 62
)
[A folder cannot be created]
•
The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
After formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File])
menu. (
[File Number Reset]: 123)
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
•
Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
736
Troubleshooting
≥Power, Battery: 736
≥Recording: 737
≥Video: 742
≥Playback: 743
≥Monitor/Viewfinder: 744
≥Flash: 744
≥Wi-Fi Function: 745
≥TV, PC, Printer: 748
≥Others: 749
First, try out the following procedures.
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
•
[Power Save Mode] is enabled. (
[Power Save Mode]: 57)
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
•
When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.
Set these settings only when recording.
• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] (
[Power Save
Mode]: 57
).
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] ([Reset]: 100) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
737
Recording
Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use
some functions.
•
In high ambient temperatures or if the camera is continuously used for
High-definition video recording, high-speed burst pictures, and HDMI output etc., the
temperature of the camera will rise.
If the camera temperature rises, [ ] will be displayed blinking on the screen.
If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating the camera cannot be used
is displayed on the screen and recording or HDMI output stops.
Wait until the camera cools down.
Cannot record images. The shutter will not operate immediately
when the shutter button is pressed.
• If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. (
[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 553)
The recorded image is whitish.
•
Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or
similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor (
Dirt on the Image Sensor:
752
)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
738
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
•
Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (
Locking Focus and
Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271
)
Multiple images are recorded at once.
•
When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot), pressing and holding the shutter
button will take burst pictures. (
Selecting the Drive Mode: 182)
• When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (
Bracket Recording: 231)
The subject is not focused properly.
•
Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (
[Shutter AF]: 556)
– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (
[Focus/Shutter Priority]: 553)
– Is AF Lock (
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 271) set where it is not
appropriate?
The recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not
effective.
•
The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
739
The recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture.
•
Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each
item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (
Adjusting Image
Quality: 288
)
– Set [Long Exposure NR] to [ON]. (
[Long Exposure NR]: 519)
• When using the camera continuously, the temperature inside of the camera rises
and the image quality may deteriorate.
Turning the camera off except when recording is recommended.
The subject appears distorted on the image.
•
When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture:
– [ELEC.]
– Video recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
This is a characteristic of the MOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
740
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting.
•
This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter (
[Shutter Type]: 240), lowering the shutter
speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be
mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] (
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 535), or fix the
shutter speed with the [ ] mode (
Creative Video Mode: 330).
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
•
Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (
ISO Sensitivity: 273)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
741
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from
the actual scene.
•
When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
•
Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (
[Pixel Refresh]: 595)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
742
Video
Cannot record videos.
•
When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
Video recording stops in the middle.
•
Recording video requires a card of a supported Speed Class. Use a compatible card.
(
Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25)
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
(
[Continuous AF]: 354).
• Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.
•
We recommend setting the [ ] mode and recording with touch operation if you
are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (
Operations During
Video Recording: 333
)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
743
Playback
Cannot playback. There are no recorded pictures.
•
Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
• Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. (
[Playback Mode]: 599)
• Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
(
[System Frequency]: 336)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
744
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
•
If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
(
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]: 57) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display
may switch to the viewfinder display.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may
change significantly for an instant.
•
This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.
•
The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may
occur on the screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of
time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
Flash
The flash does not fire.
•
The flash does not fire when using the following functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
745
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get
disconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely
affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point
• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (
Connecting by Manual Input: 665)
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
746
Cannot connect with a wireless access point.
•
The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (
Connecting by Manual Input:
665
)
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as
well as the status of other wireless devices.
Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.
•
Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.
If you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen
of the smartphone to connect.
If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the connection
settings again.
Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.
•
Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize
the user name and password, and connection is not possible.
• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
747
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The
camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
•
At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC
to which to connect. (
[PC Connection]: 674)
• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from
those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the
OS.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
•
In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. (
[Reset]: 100)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
748
TV, PC, Printer
The TV images are displayed with gray bands.
•
Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in
[Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
(
[HDMI Connection]: 590)
Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.
•
Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (
[USB]: 589)
• Turn the camera off and on.
Cannot print when the camera is connected to a printer.
•
Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
• Set the camera’s [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)]. (
[USB]: 589)
18. Materials – Troubleshooting
749
Others
When the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the
camera.
•
The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on
or off, or when the camera is swung. There is a sound from the
lens when recording.
•
This is the sound of the lens moving and aperture operation. It is not a malfunction.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
•
Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
[ ] [ ] [ ] Select desired language ([Language]: 596)
The camera becomes warm.
•
The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this
does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
750
Cautions for Use
The camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then
reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables
supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not keep objects such as credit cards that may be influenced
magnetically close to this unit.
The data on these objects may become corrupted and unusable.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
751
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
•
If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in
contact with the camera for a long period of time.
When using in cold places or at low temperatures
• Skin burns may result if you leave the metal parts of the camera in direct
contact with the skin for long periods of time at cold places (environments
with temperatures at or below 0 oC (32 oF), such as ski resorts or places at high
altitude).
Use gloves or similar when using it for long periods.
• The performance of the battery (Number of pictures that can be taken/available
recording time) may decrease temporarily at temperatures between j10 oC and
0 oC (14 oF and 32 oF).
Keep the battery warm as you are using by keeping it inside your cold weather gear
or clothes. Battery performance will recover when the internal temperature rises
again.
• The battery cannot be charged at temperatures below 0 oC (32 oF).
An error message is shown on the charger or on the camera body when charging is
not possible.
– When charging with the charger: The 50 % charged light blinks rapidly.
– When charging in the camera body: The charging light blinks.
• If using in cold locations, do not allow water droplets and snow to remain on the
camera.
If these are left on the camera, water may freeze in gaps in the camera on/off switch,
speaker, and microphone, making these parts difficult to move, and/or leading to
reduced volume. This is not a malfunction.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
752
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
•
When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung
wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to
clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel
off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
Dirt on the Image Sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the
recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust
that have affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu,
perform [Sensor Cleaning]. (
[Sensor Cleaning]: 595)
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
753
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
•
Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
• Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.
The blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.
• Do not use any objects except a blower to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Cleaning the Viewfinder
If the viewfinder is dirty, then remove the eye cup and clean.
Blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder using a commercially available
blower, then lightly wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
•
After cleaning, attach the eye cup.
• Be careful not to lose the eye cup.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
754
Monitor/Viewfinder
• Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
• Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder
screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light
constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled
precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
Lens
• When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital
camera.
• Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
• Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the
lens surface.
Before and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of
the lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.
• When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent
dust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
• To protect the lens contact points (A), do not do the following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
755
• To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the interchangeable lens
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this
does not impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on
performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Always remove the battery after use.
• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects
(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
•
The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
• The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws.
Call the RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.
(A)
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
756
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects
(such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
Charger, AC Adaptor
• The charging lights may blink under the influence of static electricity or
electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon
has no effects on charging.
• If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the AC adaptor 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
• Keep the contacts (B) of the charger and battery clean.
Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.
(B)
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
757
Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight,
or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
•
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
758
Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and
Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu:
674)
•
Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Confirm details carefully before uploading images to a web service.
Disclaimer
•
Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other
handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or
indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
•
After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including
personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have
registered or saved within the camera with [Reset] (
[Reset]: 100).
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (
[Reset]: 100)
• Remove the card from the camera.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
759
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC
data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time
• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended
humidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)
• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a
closet or a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
Image Data
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
760
Tripod
• Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
• When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with
the pedestal depending on the tripod.
Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in contact with each other may
damage this unit or the lens.
Therefore it is recommended to attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional)
before mounting on the tripod.
• Also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.
Shoulder Strap
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety
designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the
camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in
countries where it is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in
countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for
any violations.
18. Materials – Cautions for Use
761
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use
When using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to use may be
displayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be viewed as unauthorized
access.
18. Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
762
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
•
The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
• Using a Panasonic UHS-II compatible SDXC memory card.
• The values listed are approximate.
Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)
Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder)
• The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time to Sleep] in
[Power Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting]
function works as intended.
(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken: 400
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken: 410
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken: 400 (1200)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken: 410 (1200)
18. Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
763
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available recording time
(Actual available recording time) (minutes)
[Image Area of Video]
[FULL] [PIXEL/PIXEL]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
120 (60) 120 (60)
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
130 (65) 130 (65)
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
140 (70) 150 (75)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available recording time
(Actual available recording time) (minutes)
[Image Area of Video]
[FULL] [PIXEL/PIXEL]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
120 (60) 130 (65)
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
130 (65) 140 (70)
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
140 (70) 160 (80)
18. Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
764
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
•
Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available recording time
(Actual available recording time) (minutes)
[Image Area of Video]
[FULL] [PIXEL/PIXEL]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
110 (55) 120 (60)
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
120 (60) 130 (65)
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
130 (65) 140 (70)
[FHD/60p/420/8-L]
[FHD/50p/420/8-L]
140 (70) 150 (75)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available recording time
(Actual available recording time) (minutes)
[Image Area of Video]
[FULL] [PIXEL/PIXEL]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
120 (60) 120 (60)
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
130 (65) 120 (60)
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
130 (65) 130 (65)
[FHD/60p/420/8-L]
[FHD/50p/420/8-L]
140 (70) 140 (70)
18. Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
765
Playback (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Playback time (minutes): 240
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Playback time (minutes): 250
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary
depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
• If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged,
then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
18. Materials – Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
766
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken
and Video Recording Time with Cards
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on a card.
•
The values listed are approximate.
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken
• [Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
• [Aspect Ratio]: [4:3]; [Picture Quality]: [RAWiFINE]
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[L] (20M) 2910 5810 11510
[M] (10.5M) 5280 10510 20810
[S] (5M) 9220 17640 34940
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[L] (20M) 900 1810 3590
[M] (10.5M) 1050 2110 4180
[S] (5M) 1150 2290 4550
18. Materials – Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
767
Video Recording Time
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
• [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
58m00s 1h55m 3h55m
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 2h25m 4h55m 9h45m
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 2h50m 5h40m 11h25m
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 3h15m 6h30m 13h00m
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 58m00s 1h55m 3h55m
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 2h25m 4h55m 9h45m
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 3h15m 6h30m 13h00m
18. Materials – Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
768
• [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K-A/30p/422/10-I]/[4K-A/24p/422/10-I]/
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]/[C4K/24p/422/10-I]/
[4K/30p/422/10-I]/[4K/24p/422/10-I]
10m00s 21m00s 42m00s
[6K-A/30p/420/10-L]/[6K-A/24p/420/10-L]/
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]/[4K/60p/420/10-L]/
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]/[FHD/30p/422/10-I]/
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
20m00s 42m00s 1h20m
[4K-A/60p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/30p/422/10-L]/
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]/[C4K/60p/420/8-L]/
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]/[C4K/24p/422/10-L]/
[4K/60p/420/8-L]/[4K/30p/422/10-L]/
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K-A/30p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/24p/420/8-L]/
[C4K/30p/420/8-L]/[C4K/24p/420/8-L]/
[4K/30p/420/8-L]/[4K/24p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]/[FHD/60p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]/[FHD/30p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]/[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
18. Materials – Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
769
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K-A/25p/422/10-I]/[C4K/25p/422/10-I]/
[4K/25p/422/10-I]
10m00s 21m00s 42m00s
[6K-A/25p/420/10-L]/[4K-A/50p/420/10-L]/
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]/[4K/50p/420/10-L]/
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]/[FHD/25p/422/10-I]
20m00s 42m00s 1h20m
[4K-A/50p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/25p/422/10-L]/
[C4K/50p/420/8-L]/[C4K/25p/422/10-L]/
[4K/50p/420/8-L]/[4K/25p/422/10-L]
27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K-A/25p/420/8-L]/[C4K/25p/420/8-L]/
[4K/25p/420/8-L]/[FHD/50p/422/10-L]/
[FHD/50p/420/8-L]/[FHD/25p/422/10-L]/
[FHD/25p/420/8-L]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K-A/24p/422/10-I]/[C4K/24p/422/10-I]/
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
10m00s 21m00s 42m00s
[6K-A/24p/420/10-L]/[FHD/24p/422/10-I] 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]/[C4K/24p/422/10-L]/
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L]/[C4K/24p/420/8-L]/
[4K/24p/420/8-L]/[FHD/24p/422/10-L]/
[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
18. Materials – Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
770
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be
shorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File
Recording] or [Loop Recording (video)].
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of still
images that can be taken, video recording time vary.
• [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of still
images that can be taken is 10000 or more.
• The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
771
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/
Settings Available for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[Aspect Ratio] [4:3]
[Picture Quality] [FINE]
[Picture Size] [L] (20M)
[Long Exposure NR] [ON]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[200]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
[Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [OFF]
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
772
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1]
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST]
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode] [ ]
[Firing Mode] [TTL]
[Flash Adjust.] [n0 EV]
[Flash Synchro] [1ST]
[Manual Flash Adjust.] [1/1]
[Auto Exposure Comp.] [OFF]
[Wireless] [OFF]
[Wireless Channel] [1CH]
[Wireless FP] [OFF]
[Communication Light] [HIGH]
[Wireless Setup] —
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
773
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type] [OFF]
[More Settings] —
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Burst Rate] [H]
[Shutter Type] [MECH.]
[Shutter Delay] [OFF]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] [OFF]
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
[Mode] [Time Lapse Shot]
[Shooting Interval Setting] [ON]
[Start Time] [Now]
[Image Count] [1]
[Shooting Interval] [1m00s]
[Exposure Leveling] [OFF]
[Self Timer] [ ]
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
[6K 18M]
[Rec Method] [ ]
[Pre-Burst Recording] [OFF]
[Post-Focus] [6K 18M]
[Multiple Exposure]
[Start] —
[Auto Gain] [ON]
[Overlay] [OFF]
[Time Stamp Rec.] [OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
774
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode] [P]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[200]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
[Synchro Scan] [OFF]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF]
[Master Pedestal Level] [0]
[SS/Gain Operation] [SEC/ISO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [OFF]
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
775
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] or
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [MP4]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[MOV]
[Image Area of Video] [FULL]
[Rec Quality]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]:
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [FHD/
8bit/28M/50p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
[Rec Quality (My List)] —
[Variable Frame Rate] [OFF]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] [OFF]
[Count Up] [REC RUN]
[Time Code Value] —
[Time Code Mode] [DF]
[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF]
[Luminance Level] [16-255]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
776
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Continuous AF] [MODE1]
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST]
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] [OFF]
[Mute Sound Input] [OFF]
[Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] [0dB]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] [ON]
[Wind Noise Canceller] [STANDARD]
[Wind Cut] [OFF]
[Lens Noise Cut] [ON]
[Special Mic.] [STEREO]
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] [48kHz/16bit]
[Sound Output] [REALTIME]
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
777
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer] [ ]
[Self Timer For Video] [OFF]
[Focus Transition]
[Start] —
[Focus Pull Setting] —
[Focus Transition Speed] [M]
[Focus Transition Rec] [OFF]
[Focus Transition Wait] [OFF]
[Loop Recording (video)] [OFF]
[Segmented File Recording] [OFF]
[Live Cropping] [OFF]
[Time Stamp Rec.] [OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
778
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style
Settings]
[Show/Hide Photo Style] —
[My Photo Style Settings] —
[Reset Photo Style] —
[ISO Increments] [1/3 EV]
[Extended ISO] [OFF]
[Exposure Offset
Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [n0EV]
[Center Weighted] [n0EV]
[Spot] [n0EV]
[Highlight Weighted] [n0EV]
[Color Space] [sRGB]
[Exposure Comp. Reset] [OFF]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] [ON]
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
[]
[White Balance] [ ]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[AF Mode] [ ]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
779
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
[AFS] [FOCUS]
[AFC] [BALANCE]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF]
[AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF]
[AF+MF] [OFF]
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring] [ON]
[AF Mode] [ON]
[Press Joystick] [OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [PIP]
[MF Guide] [ ]/[ ]
*1
[Focus Ring Lock] [OFF]
[Show/Hide AF
Mode]
[Human/Animal Detect
AF]
[ON]
[Tracking] [ON]
[225-Area] [ON]
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)] [ON]
[Zone (Square)] [OFF]
[Zone (Oval)] [ON]
[1-Area+] [ON]
[Pinpoint] [ON]
[Custom1] [OFF]
[Custom2] [OFF]
[Custom3] [OFF]
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [MID]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [PIP]
[AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [OFF]
[PIP Display] [PIP]
[Shutter AF] [ON]
[Half-Press Shutter] [OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
780
[Assign REC to Shutter Button] [ON]
[Quick AF] [OFF]
[Eye Sensor AF] [OFF]
[Looped Focus Frame] [OFF]
[AFC Start Point (225-Area)] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Operation]
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1]
[Front Dial Assignment] [Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)] —
[Item Customize (Video)] —
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] [ON]
[Touch Tab] [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF]
[Touch Pad AF] [OFF]
[Operation Lock
Setup]
[Cursor] [ ]
[Joystick] [ ]
[Touch Screen] [ ]
[Dial] [ ]
[DISP. Button] [ ]
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode] —
[Setting in PLAY mode] —
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [AFTER PRESSING2]
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[OFF]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
781
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1]
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]
[Control Dial Assignment] [ ]
[Exposure Comp.] [OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
—
[Rotation (Menu
Operation)]
[]
[Joystick Setting] [D.FOCUS Movement]
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] [Video Record]
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [OFF]
[Duration Time (6K/4K
PHOTO)]
[HOLD]
[Duration Time
(Post-Focus)]
[HOLD]
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[OFF]
[Constant Preview]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Histogram] [OFF]
[Photo Grid Line] [OFF]
[AF Area Display] [ON]
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF] [OFF]
[SET] [M]
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [OFF]
[LVF] [OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
782
[LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] [ ]
[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ]
[Horizontal Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Vertical Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Expo.Meter] [OFF]
[Focal Length] [ON]
[Blinking Highlights] [OFF]
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[I.S. Status Scope] [OFF]
[Level Gauge] [ON]
[Luminance Spot Meter] [OFF]
[Framing Outline] [OFF]
[Show/Hide Monitor
Layout]
[Control Panel] [ON]
[Black Screen] [ON]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
783
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[V-LogL View
Assist]
[Read LUT File] —
[LUT Select] [Vlog_709]
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE2]
[HDMI] [AUTO]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
[Monochrome Live View] [OFF]
[Center Marker] [OFF]
[Frame Marker]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/
[ZEBRA1+2]/[OFF]
[OFF]
[SET] —
[WFM/Vector Scope] [OFF]
[Color Bars] —
[Video-Priority Display] [OFF]
[Red REC Frame Indicator] [OFF]
[Streaming Blue Frame Indicator] [OFF]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
784
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [IN/OUT]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] [ON]
[Down Convert] [AUTO]
[HDMI Recording Control] [OFF]
[Sound Down Convert] [OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON]
[HDMI MF Assist Output] [ON]
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Lens Focus Resume] [OFF]
[Power Zoom Lens]
[Step Zoom] [OFF]
[Zoom Speed] ([Photo]) [M]
[Zoom Speed] ([Video]) [M]
[Zoom Ring] [ON]
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop]
[Aperture Ring Increment] [1/3EV]
[Focus Ring
Control]
[NON-LINEAR]/[LINEAR] [NON-LINEAR]
[SET] [300°]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Lens Info. Confirmation] [ON]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)] [ON]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
785
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Card/File]
[Card Format] —
[Double Card Slot
Function]
[Recording Method] [ ]
[Destination Card Slot] [ ]
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder] —
[Create a New Folder] —
[File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link]
[File Number Reset] —
[Copyright
Information]
[Artist] [OFF]
[Copyright Holder] [OFF]
[Display Copyright Info.] —
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] [5MIN.]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON]
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.]
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
—
[Monitor Frame Rate] [60fps]
[LVF Frame Rate] [60fps]
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] —
[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] [AUTO]
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] [HIGH]
[LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/MON AUTO]
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.] —
[Level Gauge Value
Reset]
—
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
786
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Tone] [ ]
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ]
[E-Shutter Tone] [ ]
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]
[Wi-Fi] —
*2
[Bluetooth] —
[USB]
[USB Mode]
[ ][Select on
connection]
[USB Power Supply] [ON]
[Battery Use Priority] [BG]
[HDMI Connection]
[Output
Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO]
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [OFF]
[Background
Color(Playback)]
[]
[Photo Luminance Level] [16-255]
[Power/Network Indicator] [ON]
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
787
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Setting]
[Save to Custom Mode] —
[Load Custom Mode] —
[Custom Mode
Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
[3]
[Edit Title] —
[How to Reload Custom
Mode]
—
[Select Loading Details] —
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting]
[Save] —
[Load] —
[Delete] —
[Keep Settings While
Format]
[OFF]
[Reset] —
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Others]
[Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2021
[Time Zone]
*1
[System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]/
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
*1
[Pixel Refresh] —
[Sensor Cleaning] —
[Language]
*1
[Firmware Version] —
[Online Manual] —
[Approved Regulations] —
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
788
Menu Default setting
[My Menu]: [Edit My Menu]
[Add] —
[Sorting] —
[Delete] —
[Display from My Menu] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Playback Mode]
[Playback Mode] [Normal Play]
[Slide Show] —
[Rotate Disp.] [ON]
[Picture Sort] [DATE/TIME]
[Magnify from AF Point] [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE2]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Process Image]
[RAW Processing] —
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] —
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction] [AUTO]
[Time Lapse Video] —
[Stop Motion Video] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Add/Delete Info.]
[Protect] —
[Rating] —
18. Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
789
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
*2 Only the settings of [Streaming Function] and [Streaming Quality] in [Streaming
Setup] are saved.
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Edit Image]
[Resize] —
[Rotate] —
[Video Divide] —
[Copy] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Others]
[Delete Confirmation] ["No" first]
[Delete All Images] —
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
790
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each
Recording Mode
Menu iA P A S M
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[Long Exposure NR]
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Min. Shutter Speed]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
791
Menu iA P A S M
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
Menu iA P A S M
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode]
[Firing Mode]
[Flash Adjust.]
[Flash Synchro]
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
[Wireless]
[Wireless Channel]
[Wireless FP]
[Communication Light]
[Wireless Setup]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
792
Menu iA P A S M
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type]
[More Settings]
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Burst Rate]
[Shutter Type]
[Shutter Delay]
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
[Time Lapse/Animation]
[Self Timer]
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
[Rec Method]
[Pre-Burst Recording]
[Post-Focus]
[Multiple Exposure]
[Start]
[Auto Gain]
[Overlay]
[Time Stamp Rec.]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
793
Menu iA P A S M
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Synchro Scan]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[Master Pedestal Level]
[SS/Gain Operation]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
794
Menu iA P A S M
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
[Image Area of Video]
[Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality (My List)]
[Variable Frame Rate]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
[Count Up]
[Time Code Value]
[Time Code Mode]
[HDMI Time Code
Output]
[Luminance Level]
Menu iA P A S M
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET]
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
795
Menu iA P A S M
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Mute Sound Input]
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
[Wind Cut]
[Lens Noise Cut]
[Special Mic.]
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
[Sound Output]
[Headphone Volume]
18. Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
796
Menu iA P A S M
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer]
[Self Timer For Video]
[Focus Transition]
[Loop Recording (video)]
[Segmented File Recording]
[Live Cropping]
[Time Stamp Rec.]
18. Materials – Specifications
797
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-GH5M2):
Information for your safety
Power source:
9.0 V
Power consumption:
4.5 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.8 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)]
4.4 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.7 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)]
Type
≥ Type
Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
≥ Recording media
SD memory card / SDHC memory card
*1
/ SDXC memory card
*1
*1 Compliant with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, UHS-II Video Speed Class
90
Double slot recording function is available.
≥ Lens mount
Micro Four Thirds mount
18. Materials – Specifications
798
Image sensor
≥ Image sensor
4/3q Live MOS sensor, total pixel number 21,770,000 pixels, Primary color filter
≥ Effective number of pixels of the camera
20,330,000 pixels
Latitude
12 stops ([V-Log L])
Recording format for still images
≥ File format for still images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW
≥ File format for 6K/4K photos
6K photo: MP4 (H.265/HEVC, AAC (2ch))
4K photo: MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))
≥ Picture size (pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5184k3888
[M]: 3712k2784
[S]: 2624k1968
6K photo: 4992k3744
4K photo: 3328k2496
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 5184k3456
[M]: 3712k2480
[S]: 2624k1752
6K photo: 5184k3456
4K photo: 3504k2336
18. Materials – Specifications
799
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 5184k2920
[M]: 3840k2160
[S]: 1920k1080
4K photo: 3840k2160
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 3888k3888
[M]: 2784k2784
[S]: 1968k1968
4K photo: 2880k2880
≥ Image quality for pictures
Fine / Standard / RAWiFine / RAWiStandard / RAW
Recording format for video
≥ Video format
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
≥ Audio format
MP4: AAC (2ch)
MOV: LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/16-bit)
*2
*2 When an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is attached, LPCM
(2ch, 48 kHz/24-bit, 96 kHz/24-bit) can be selected
≥ System frequency
59.94 Hz / 50.00 Hz / 24.00 Hz
≥ Image quality for video
Refer to [Rec Quality] in this document for information about resolution, recording
frame rate, and other elements of recording quality (
[Rec Quality]: 338)
18. Materials – Specifications
800
Viewfinder
≥ System
Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.5 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots, organic EL (OLED) live view
viewfinder
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
≥ Magnification
Approx. 0.76k (35 mm film camera equivalent)
(j1.0 m
j1
50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [4:3])
≥ Eye point
Approx. 21 mm (at j1.0 m
j1
)
≥ Diopter adjustment range
j4.0 to i3.0 diopter
≥ Eye sensor
Yes
Monitor
≥ System
Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch
screen
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
18. Materials – Specifications
801
Focus
≥ AF type
TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF)
≥ Focus mode
AFS / AFC / MF
≥ AF mode
Automatic detection (Face/Eye/Body/Animal) / Tracking / 225-Area / Zone
(Vertical/Horizontal) / Zone (Square) / Zone (Oval) /
1-AreaiSupplementary (Automatic detection possible) / 1-Area (Automatic
detection possible) / Pinpoint / Custom1, 2, 3,
Focus area selection is possible by touching or with the joystick
Exposure control
≥ Light metering system, Light metering mode
1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering /
highlight-weighted metering
≥ Metering range
EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
≥ Exposure
Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual
Exposure (M)
≥ Exposure compensation
1/3 EV steps, n5EV
≥ ISO sensitivity (standard output sensitivity)
AUTO / 200 to 25600,
When [Extended ISO] is set: AUTO / 100 to 25600,
1/3 EV steps
18. Materials – Specifications
802
White balance
AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash /
White set 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
Shutter
≥ Format
Focal-plane shutter
≥ Shutter speed
Pictures:
Mechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a
second
Electronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/2000 of a
second
Electronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/16000 of a
second
Videos:
1/25
*3
of a second to 1/16000 of a second
*3 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in [ ] and focus mode is set to [MF],
this can be set up to 1/2
≥ Flash synchronization speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/250 of a second
18. Materials – Specifications
803
Burst recording
≥ Burst rate
High speed (Mechanical shutter/Electronic front curtain): 12 frames/second
([AFS], [MF]), 9 frames/second ([AFC])
High speed (Electronic shutter): 12 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]), 7 frames/second
([AFC])
Medium speed: 7 frames/second
Low speed: 2 frames/second
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable
[FINE] / [STD.]: 999 frames or more
[RAWiFINE] / [RAWiSTD.] / [RAW]: 108 frames or more
[When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic
(Using an UHS-
II compatible card.)]
Zoom
≥ Extended Tele Conversion (Picture)
Max. 2.0k (when a picture size of [S] is selected.)
Display language
[ENGLISH] / [DEUTSCH] / [FRANÇAIS] / [ITALIANO] / [ESPAÑOL] / [繁體中文 ] /
[PORTUGUÊS] / [日本語]
Microphone / Speaker
≥ Microphone
Stereo
≥ Speaker
Monaural
18. Materials – Specifications
804
Interface
≥ USB
USB Type-C™, SuperSpeed USB3.1 GEN1, Supports USB Power Delivery (9.0 V/
3.0 A)
≥ [HDMI]
HDMI Type A
≥ [REMOTE]
‰ 2.5 mm jack
≥ [MIC]
‰ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
≥ Headphones
‰ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
≥ Flash Synchro
Yes
Splash Resistant
Yes
External dimensions / Mass
≥ External dimensions
Approx. 138.5 mm (W)k98.1 mm (H)k87.4 mm (D)
(5.45q (W)k3.86q (H)k3.44q (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 727
g/1.60 lb (camera body, with battery and one card)
Approx. 647
g/1.43 lb (only camera body)
18. Materials – Specifications
805
Operating environment
≥ Recommended operating temperature
j10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
• Battery performance temporarily worsens at low temperatures (j10 oC to 0 oC
(14 oF to 32 oF)), reducing the number of pictures that can be taken and the
available recording time.
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Wi-Fi
≥ Compliance standard
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
Specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was
purchased.
Refer to the “Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>” (supplied) for details.
≥ Encryption method
Wi-Fi compliant WPA™ / WPA2™
≥ Access method
Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth
≥ Compliance standard
Bluetooth v4.2, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
18. Materials – Specifications
806
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the following:
• This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and
“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).
The camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.
Exif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be added.
Interchangeable Lens:
H-ES12060 “LEICA DG VARIO-ELMARIT 12–60mm/F2.8–4.0 ASPH./
POWER O.I.S.”
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
Mount Micro Four Thirds Mount
Focal length
f=12 mm to 60 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm)
Lens construction
14 elements in 12 groups (4 aspherical lenses, 2 ED
lenses)
Aperture type 9 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F2.8 (Wide) to F4.0 (Tele)
Minimum aperture value F22
Angle of view 84o (Wide) to 20o (Tele)
In focus distance
Wide: 0.20 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ / Tele: 0.24 m (0.79 feet)
to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)
Maximum image
magnification
0.3k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.6k)
Optical Image Stabilizer Yes
Filter diameter 62 mm
18. Materials – Specifications
807
• LEICA is a registered trademark of Leica Microsystems IR GmbH. ELMARIT is a
registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.
The LEICA DG lenses are manufactured using measurement instruments and
quality assurance systems that have been certified by Leica Camera AG based on
the company’s quality standards.
Interchangeable Lens:
H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12–60mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./POWER
O.I.S.”
Maximum diameter ‰68.4 mm (2.7q)
Overall length
Approx. 86 mm (3.4q) (from the tip of the lens to the
base side of the lens mount)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 320 g (0.70 lb)
Dust and splash resistant Yes
Recommended operating
temperature
j10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Mount Micro Four Thirds Mount
Focal length
f=12 mm to 60 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm)
Lens construction
11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED
lens)
Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
Minimum aperture value F22
Angle of view 84o (Wide) to 20o (Tele)
18. Materials – Specifications
808
In focus distance
Wide: 0.20 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ / Tele: 0.25 m (0.82 feet)
to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)
Maximum image
magnification
0.27k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.54k)
Optical Image Stabilizer Yes
Filter diameter 58 mm
Maximum diameter ‰66.0 mm (2.6q)
Overall length
Approx. 71 mm (2.8q) (from the tip of the lens to the
base side of the lens mount)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 210 g (0.46 lb)
Dust and splash resistant Yes
Recommended operating
temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
18. Materials – Trademarks and Licences
809
Trademarks and Licences
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered
trademarks of OM Digital Solutions Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
• USB Type-C™ and USB-C™ are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
• The USB Type-C™ Charging Trident Logos are trademarks of USB Implementers
Forum, Inc.
• The SuperSpeed USB Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB Implementers
Forum, Inc.
• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
18. Materials – Trademarks and Licences
810
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Final Cut Pro, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a
registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
• Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
18. Materials – Trademarks and Licences
811
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL
V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version
2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/
or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to
the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET]
[Setup]
[Others] [Firmware Version] [Software info].
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third
party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more
than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or
LGPL V2.1, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
The source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website
below.
https://panasonic.net/cns/oss/index.html
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video
in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from
a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,
L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
